DIP User Manual

409
GRID e-terra terra terra terragridcom DIP DIP DIP DIP Teleprotection USER’S Manual DIP/EN U/C23 V2.3

description

dip5000

Transcript of DIP User Manual

Page 1: DIP User Manual

GRID

eeee----terraterraterraterragridcom DIPDIPDIPDIP Teleprotection

USER’S Manual

DIP/EN U/C23

V2.3

Page 2: DIP User Manual
Page 3: DIP User Manual

User's Manual

DIP/EN U/C23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/2

DIP Teleprotection

CONTENT

Area File name Reference

Overview DIP_EN_OS_A23.pdf DIP/EN OS/A23

Safety Section DIP_EN_SS_B23.pdf DIP/EN SS/B23

Main Characteristics DIP_EN_IT_B23.pdf DIP/EN IT/B23

Installation DIP_EN_IN_A23.pdf DIP/EN IN/A23

Commissioning DIP_EN_CM_B23.pdf DIP/EN CM/B23

Maintenance DIP_EN_MT_A23.pdf DIP/EN MT/A23

Human Machine Interface Analogue Single Tone 1-DIP_EN_HI_A23.pdf DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface Analogue Dual Tone 2-DIP_EN_HI_A23.pdf DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface Digital 3-DIP_EN_HI_B23.pdf DIP/EN HI/B23

Page 4: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN U/B23

User's Manual

Page 2/2 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 5: DIP User Manual

Overview

DIP/EN OS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP

OVERVIEW

Page 6: DIP User Manual
Page 7: DIP User Manual

Overview

DIP/EN OS/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/6

CONTENTS

1. OVERVIEW 5

1.1 Safety Section 5

1.2 Main Characteristics 5

1.3 Installation 5

1.4 Human machine Interface DIP DIGITAL 5

1.5 Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG SINGLE TONE 5

1.6 Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE 5

1.7 Commissioning 5

1.8 Maintenance 5

2. DEFINITIONS 6

Page 8: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN OS/A23

Overview

Page 2/6 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 9: DIP User Manual

Overview

DIP/EN OS/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/6

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS

A11 11/14/2007 ORIGINAL ISSUE

A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2

A23 13/01/2011 Version 2.3

Page 10: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN OS/A23

Overview

Page 4/6 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 11: DIP User Manual

Overview

DIP/EN OS/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/6

1. OVERVIEW

The DIP User manual includes eight sections:

• Safety section,

• Presentation,

• Installation,

• Human Machine Interface DIP DIGITAL ,

• Human Machine Interface DIP ANALOG SINGLE TONE,

• Human Machine Interface DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE,

• Commissioning,

• Maintenance.

1.1 Safety Section

The Safety Section provides full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to typical equipment label markings.

1.2 Main Characteristics

The Presentation Section provides full information on DIP DIGITAL and ANALOG features, equipment description, main characteristics and performances.

1.3 Installation

The Installation Section provides full information on equipment description, shipment, environmental conditions, boards installation, power supply boards and VDC range, equipment connection.

1.4 Human machine Interface DIP DIGITAL

The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation, system requirement, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating the HMI.

1.5 Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG SINGLE TONE

The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation, system requirements, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating the HMI (Single tone and dual tone modes).

1.6 Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE

The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation, system requirements, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating the HMI (Single tone and dual tone modes).

1.7 Commissioning

The Commissioning Section provides full information on DIP commissioning, configuring hardware, testing and fault isolation during commissioning, checks.

1.8 Maintenance

The Maintenance Section provides full information on DIP Maintenance, Testing and Fault isolation, firmware upgrade.

Page 12: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN OS/A23

Overview

Page 6/6 e-terragridcom DIP

2. DEFINITIONS

Summary of some of the terms and acronyms used in this manual

• Dependability - Ability of a Teleprotection link to issue a valid command in the presence of interference and or noise. For convenience, the probability of missing command Pmc is usually measured, the dependability is therefore given by 1 - Pmc.

• Security - Ability of a system to prevent interference or noise from generating a command state at the receiving end when no command is transmitted. For convenience, the probability of unwanted command Puc is usually measured, the security is then given by 1 - Puc.

• Nominal transmission time - The time elapsed between the moment of a change of state at the transmitter input and the moment of the corresponding change of state at the receiver output when there is no interference or noise. This time does not include propagation time.

• Guard - The guard signal is a signal that is transmitted to monitor the integrity of the teleprotection system and it effectively supervises the channel in terms of the signal quality. Other monitoring is also employed. When present, the guard signal inhibits any command output of the teleprotection receiver.

• Command signal - The command signal is a signal that is transmitted to produce a change of state at a remote location. The requirements for the command signal are dependent upon the type of scheme.

• Permissive trip - Protection schemes where the received command initiates tripping without qualification by local protection. Intertrip channels utilize similar principles to permissive trip channels, however, security against unwanted operation and dependability of correct operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements, particularly in analogue systems.

• Direct trip / Inter-trip - Protective schemes where the received command initiates tripping without qualification that are similar in operation to permissive trip with the exception that security against unwanted operation and dependability of correct operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements.

• Blocking - Protective schemes where the received command blocks the operation of local protection. These channels utilise similar principles to permissive trip channels; however dependability of operation and speed are prime requirements. . VF - Voice Frequency.

• DCE - Data Communication Equipment.

• DTE - Data Terminal Equipment.

• LF (AF) - Low Frequency. Signals transmitted in the 0-4 kHz base band. Also called Audio Frequency.

• FV - Guard Frequency.

• FC - Command Frequency.

• TMS – Teleprotection Monitoring System.

• St = Single tone analog version.

• Dt = Dual tone analog version.

Page 13: DIP User Manual

Safety Section

DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP

SAFETY SECTION

Page 14: DIP User Manual
Page 15: DIP User Manual

Safety Section

DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/12

STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR ALSTOM TELEPROTECTION

EQUIPMENT

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3

3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4

3.1 Symbols 4

3.2 Labels 4

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING, AND SERVICING 4

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 6

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 7

6.1 Protective fuse rating 7

6.2 Protective class 7

6.3 Installation category 7

6.4 Environment 7

Page 16: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN SS/A23

Safety Section Page 2/12 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 17: DIP User Manual

Safety Section

DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/12

1. INTRODUCTION

This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling,

commissioning, and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes references to typical

equipment label markings.

The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant

equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents

of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.

Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed,

commissioned, or serviced.

Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.

2. HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that

equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the

equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel

and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.

Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper

storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance, and servicing. For this

reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the

system to which it is being connected;

• Are able to perform safely switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering

practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and

label it;

• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;

• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation.

However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all

topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper

authorization. Contact the appropriate ALSTOM technical sales office and request the necessary

information.

Page 18: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN SS/A23

Safety Section Page 4/12 e-terragridcom DIP

3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons, the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the

equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or commissioned.

3.1 Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

Note: This symbol may also be used for a

Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that

terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-

assembly, e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL IS THE

DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.

3.2 Labels

See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labelling information.

4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING, AND SERVICING

Equipment connections

Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment

should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.

Equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning, or servicing

the equipment.

The equipment and cabinet must be earthed as specified in IEC 60950-1.

The equipment must be supplied over a circuit breaker for the power supply. The circuit

breaker must be switched off.

Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning, and maintenance may present a

hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.

Do not work on the equipment or connecting cables during a lightning storm.

Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage; also electronic

parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not

taken.

If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel

to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.

To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire

size should be used.

The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.

Page 19: DIP User Manual

Safety Section

DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/12

Before removing top cover, the isolating terminals of external cables must be opened or

disconnected.

Protection Class I Equipment:

- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor

terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of

plug connected equipment.

- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the

protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.

- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate

cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth)

conductor be checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth

connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections

should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.

The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² (3.3 mm² for

North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment

documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations.

The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible.

All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-

wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are

isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-

wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped

connections.

Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:

- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);

- Protective fuse rating;

- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable);

- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, suitable to the application.

It is important that this instruction manual be read and fully understood by all people

involved, including personnel that has already undergone training and is otherwise qualified

before changing configuration or carrying out maintenance. Otherwise the warranty will not

be applicable.

Accidental touching of exposed terminals

If working in a restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to

accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable

protective barrier should be provided.

Unused connectors in the equipment sub-racks should be terminated with blank plugs.

Equipment use

If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection

provided by the equipment may be impaired.

Removal of the equipment front panel/cover

Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not

be touched until the electrical power is removed.

Page 20: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN SS/A23

Safety Section Page 6/12 e-terragridcom DIP

Equipment operating conditions

The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.

If the link gets disturbed while tuning, testing, simulating alarms, making measurements and

loading new configurations, appropriate measures must be taken to prevent the protection

signal transmission being used.

Before switching on the circuit breaker, check that the equipment/cabinet is securely

connected to the protective earth/ground and check the polarity and value of the power

supply.

Insulation and dielectric strength testing

Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each

part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero to discharge capacitors,

before the test leads are disconnected.

Insertion of modules and pcb cards

Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it

is energized, since this may result in damage.

Fibre optic communication

Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly.

Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.

Cleaning

The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth dampened with clean water, when no

connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum

jelly, which should not be removed.

5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning

The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to

earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the

equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the

external terminals prior to

de-commissioning.

Disposal

It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses be avoided. The

equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries

should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits.

Particular regulations within the country of operation may apply to the disposal of the

equipment.

Page 21: DIP User Manual

Safety Section

DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/12

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.

6.1 Protective fuse rating

The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipment is 16A, high rupture

capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. The protective fuse should be located as close to

the unit as possible.

6.2 Protective class

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the

EN 60255-27: 2005 equipment documentation). This equipment

requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to

ensure user safety.

6.3 Installation category

IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation category II (Overvoltage Category II):

EN 60255-27: 2005 Distribution level, fixed installation.

Equipment in this category is qualification tested at

2,5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all supply

circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.

6.4 Environment

The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor

environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the

requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water

protected).

Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety Altitude

- Operation up to 2000m standards.

IEC 60255-27:2005

EN 60255-27: 2005

Page 22: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN SS/A23

Safety Section Page 8/12 e-terragridcom DIP

SPECIFIC SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR DIP TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT

Personnel qualification: authorized and properly trained personnel only are admitted

to carry out installing, programming, commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting,

and operation of the equipment.

Technical specifications: the equipment must be operated within the technical

specifications. Failure to do so may result in personal injuries or equipment damage.

Alteration: alteration of the equipment is not allowed.

Insertion and removal of plug-in modules: neither removal nor insertion of

modules, except for redundant power supply units, is permitted. Before inserting or

removing modules, the power supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.

ESD protection: the modules in this equipment contain devices which can be

damaged by electrostatic discharges. Appropriate measures must be taken before

unpacking modules or removing them from equipment racks. Grounding straps for

technical personnel and the provision of anti-static workbenches are essential

precautions to prevent ESD damage when handling or working on modules. Modules

may only be shipped either in their original packing or installed in equipment racks.

Mechanical installation: the equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.

Page 23: DIP User Manual

Safety Section

DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/12

Cabinets which are not secured to the floor tip forwards when the hinged frame is

opened. Do not open the hinged frame without precautions.

Electrical installation: this is Class I equipment as defined in EN 60255-27. The

equipment and cubicle/cabinet shall be solidly bonded to the protective (earth)

conductor for both safety and electromagnetic compatibility reasons. The equipment

must be protected by circuit breakers or fuses with a maximum rating of 16 Amps.

All circuit breakers in the cabinet must be switch OFF before working on the

equipment.

Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or from the equipment.

The isolating terminals of the external cables must be kept open during installation,

maintenance and before storage, decommissioning, and disposal.

Ensure that all supply inputs have been isolated/switched off before installing the

equipment.

When an analog DIP is connected to cables, pilot wires, or leased circuits, the

equipment must only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers withstanding a

15kVrms or 20kVrms test voltage at 50Hz/60Hz for 1 mn, according to national

regulations or electric utilities’ practice.

Page 24: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN SS/A23

Safety Section Page 10/12 e-terragridcom DIP

Fibre optic installation: Optical connectors: clean all optical connectors by an

approved method before making any optical connection; do not rotate the optical

connector unnecessarily when making an optical connection. When not connected, fit

all optical plugs and couplings with protective caps.

Damage to optical fibres: when dressing fibres, take care not to exceed the minimum

bend radius (typically 35mm) and do not over tighten binders used for dressing as

damage may result.

Back cover: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels behind the back

cover.

Working on the equipment: do not work on the system or connect or disconnect

cables during periods of lightning.

Electrical strength test: do not repeat any electrical tests. Improper test methods can

cause severe damage to the equipment. Electric strength and earth continuity tests

have been performed in the factory.

EMC: this is class A equipment. In a domestic environment, this equipment may

cause radio interference. In this case, the user may be required to take appropriate

measures.

Power supply for alarm: this shall be protected against overcurrents and short circuit

conditions.

Page 25: DIP User Manual

Safety Section

DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/12

Common interface UT148: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels on the

module and the cable. Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Relay interface SRxxx: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels on the

module and the cable. Do not touch the module and the cable leads.

Laser / LED: take care using optical cards IR182/IR185, class I Laser/LED product.

Using HMI DIP : the teleprotection link can be disturbed while using certain

maintenance functions of the DIP HMI (e.g. forcing commands).

During routine tests with the DIP in operation, “Reset device” in the menu should

not be activated, as this causes the DIP to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for

approximately 5 seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.

Commissioning: do not close/establish any connections to protection devices until the

DIP is properly commissioned.

Page 26: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN SS/A23

Safety Section Page 12/12 e-terragridcom DIP

Supervision network port P19 : As per as IEC 60950 compliancy, when voltage

higher than 60 Vcc are involved in the DIP, the supervision network port P19 cannot

be used as direct access HMI port, so no operation could be performed directly with a

PC (please refer to Installation part chapter 8)

Input and Ouput Voltage : Inputs / outputs at very low voltage ( below 60 Vcc) are

isolated from dangerous voltage by a main insulation, so the level of voltage are not

guaranteed in case of equipment failure.

I/O connection : Inputs and outputs shall not be connected to equipment that may be

used by an operator or service person. Only service persons are entitled to handle the

equipment when voltage higher than 60 Vcc are involved.

Access to the equipment : In this equipment has been design for installation in the

substation with an access strictly restricted to service persons or operators who have

been informed of the safety rules and risk of intervention.

Page 27: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23 e-terragridcom DIP

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

Page 28: DIP User Manual
Page 29: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/44

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 6

2. DEFINITIONS 7

3. OVERVIEW 8

4. DIP GENERAL PRESENTATION AND FEATURES 9

4.1 Protection schemes managed 10

4.2 Optional features 11

4.3 Allocation of logical input commands 11

4.4 Alarms 12

4.5 Auto-tests 12

4.6 Ease of use 12

4.6.1 Customization 12

4.6.2 HMI monitoring features 13

4.6.3 Features of tests and maintenance. 13

4.7 Accessories 14

5. DIGITAL MODE 15

5.1 Principle of digital transmission 15

5.2 Interfaces available in the digital mode 15

5.2.1 Digital interfaces managed 16

5.2.2 IR185 optical fiber interface 17

5.2.3 IR187 optical interfaces 17

5.2.4 SFP modules 18

5.2.5 Path redundancy. 19

5.3 Optimizing the transmission medium 20

5.4 Number of commands 20

5.5 Applications 20

5.6 Link control 20

5.7 Maintenance and loopback 21

6. ANALOG MODE 22

6.1 Frequency coding of the single tone version 22

6.2 Frequency coding of the dual tone version 23

6.3 Description of the communication interface 24

6.4 Characteristics specific to the analog mode 24

Page 30: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 2/44

6.4.1 Transmission medium (all versions) 24

6.4.2 Optimizing the single tone version 24

6.4.3 Number of commands – Single tone version 24

6.4.4 Link test 26

6.4.5 Unblocking feature 26

6.4.6 Voltage presence 26

6.4.7 External alarm input 26

6.4.8 DIP connected to a PLC 26

6.5 Characteristics specific to the analog mode in the dual tone version 28

7. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 29

8. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS 31

8.1 Mechanical characteristics 31

8.2 Environmental characteristics 32

8.3 Electrical characteristics of the power supply 33

8.4 Characteristics of the IRIG-B interface 33

8.5 Operating characteristics 34

8.6 Characteristics of digital transmission 37

8.7 Characteristics of SFP modules 38

8.7.1 Single mode unidirectional modules 38

8.7.2 Single mode bidirectional modules 38

8.7.3 Multimode unidirectional module 38

8.8 Characteristics of voice frequency transmission 39

8.8.1 General characteristics 39

8.8.2 Band sharing - Single tone version 39

8.8.3 Band sharing – Dual tone version 40

9. PERFORMANCE 41

9.1 Digital interfaces 41

9.1.1 Maximum transfer time according to transmission speed 41

9.1.2 Transfer time according to the IEEE C37-94 protocol 41

9.1.3 Security 41

9.1.4 Dependability 42

9.2 Analog interface – Single tone version 42

9.2.1 Transmission time 42

9.2.2 Security (bandwidth 300-3 400 Hz) 42

9.2.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz) 42

9.3 Analog interface – Dual tone version 43

9.3.1 Transmission time 43

9.3.2 Security (bandwidth 300- 1900 Hz) 43

9.3.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300 - 1900 Hz) 43

Page 31: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/44

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 – DIP ENVIRONMENT 9

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF LINK WITH E-TERRAGRIDCOM OCM 5000 14

FIGURE 3 – DIGITAL INTERFACES 16

FIGURE 4 – UNIDIRECTIONAL MODULE 18

FIGURE 5 – BIDIRECTIONAL MODULE 18

FIGURE 6 – BIDIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION 19

FIGURE 7 – REDUNDANCY DIAGRAM 19

FIGURE 8 – LOOPBACK 21

FIGURE 9 - TRANSMISSION – SINGLE TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND 22

FIGURE 10 - TRANSMISSION – DUAL TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND 23

FIGURE 11 – VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE 24

FIGURE 12 – LINK TEST – ANALOG MODE 26

FIGURE 13 - EXAMPLE OF AUTOMATIC POWER PROCESS 27

FIGURE 14 – DIP RACK 29

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 1– LOG FUNCTION 11

TABLE 2– CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES 22

TABLE 3 – CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES 23

TABLE 4 – DIP BOARDS 30

TABLE 5 – MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS 31

TABLE 6 – ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS 32

TABLE 7 – POWER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS 33

TABLE 8 – OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS 35

TABLE 9 – CHARACTERISTICS OF PREVIOUS VERSIONS 36

TABLE 10 – DIGITAL TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS 37

TABLE 11 – CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES 38

TABLE 12 – CHARACTERISTICS OF BIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES 38

TABLE 13 – CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL MM MODULES 38

TABLE 14 – GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VOICE FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION 39

TABLE 15 – BAND SHARING – SINGLE TONE VERSION 39

TABLE 16 – DUAL TONE VERSION FREQUENCIES 40

TABLE 17 – FREQUENCIES AND BANDWIDTH (DUAL TONE VERSION) 40

TABLE 18 – MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION TIMES FOR ELECTRICAL AND IR187 BOARDS 41

TABLE 19 – MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION DATA FOR THE IE185 BOARD WITH MUX 41

TABLE 20 – TRANSMISSION TIME SINGLE TONE VERSION 42

TABLE 21 – TRANSMISSION TIME DUAL TONE VERSION 43

Page 32: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 4/44

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS

A 17/10/2000 Original issue

B 18/04/2001 Optical interface added

C 02/06/2004 Analog part added

D11 14/11/2007 New features, new structure

E11 11/02/2008 Minor corrections

A22 23/08/2009 Software version 2.2

B22 01/06/2010 Minor corrections, added I/O SR200 and optical interface IR187

A23 29/11/2010 Software version 2.3

B23 17/03/2011 Update of the transfer time with SR200 board

Page 33: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/44

BLANK PAGE

Page 34: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 6/44

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.

(1) As per the option chosen

Page 35: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/44

2. DEFINITIONS

Summary of some of the terms and acronyms used in this manual

• Dependability - Ability of a Teleprotection link to issue a valid command in the presence of interference and or noise. For convenience, the probability of missing command Pmc is usually measured, the dependability is therefore given by 1 - Pmc.

• Security - Ability of a system to prevent interference or noise from generating a command state at the receiving end when no command is transmitted. For convenience, the probability of unwanted command Puc is usually measured, the security is then given by 1 - Puc.

• Nominal transmission time - The time elapsed between the moment of a change of state at the transmitter input and the moment of the corresponding change of state at the receiver output when there is no interference or noise. This time does not exclude the propagation time due to the transmission medium.

• Guard - The guard signal is a signal that is transmitted to monitor the integrity of the teleprotection system and it effectively supervises the channel in terms of the signal quality. Other monitoring methods are also employed. When present, the guard signal inhibits any command output of the teleprotection receiver

• Command signal - The command signal is a signal that is transmitted to produce a change of state at a remote location. The requirements for the command signal are dependent upon the type of scheme.

• Permissive tripping - Protection schemes where the received command initiates trip without qualification by local protection. Command channels of this type can run in a voice frequency band, a PLC frequency band or with a digital binary speed. The channel is often designed to provide high operating dependability, particularly when the telecommunication channel may be impacted, e.g. due to disturbance in the power supply.

• Direct tripping / Remote tripping - Protection schemes where the received command initiates tripping without qualification by local protection. These schemes are similar to permissive trip, except that requirements in terms of security against untimely commands and lack of faulty command are essential. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements, particularly in analogue systems.

• Blocking - Protective schemes where the received command blocks the operation of local protection. These channels use principles similar to permissive tripping channels. However, they have higher operating dependability and speed requirements.

• VF - Voice Frequency.

• DCE - Data Communication Equipment

• DTE - Data Terminal Equipment

• LF (AF) - Low Frequency. Signals transmitted in the 0-4 kHz base band. Also called Audio Frequency.

• GF - Guard Frequency

• CF - Command Frequency.

• SFP - Small form Factor Pluggable.

• WDM - Wave-length Division Multiplexing.

Page 36: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 8/44

3. OVERVIEW

ALSTOM’s DIP equipment requires no maintenance, is easy to start up and offers high installation flexibility.

The features described in this manual apply to the last product release.

It may be monitored and managed remotely through a telecommunication network using different systems:

• Standard management system using the SNMP protocol, e.g. e-terra SENTINEL by ALSTOM.

• Remote access through a TCP/IP network.

The DIP teleprotection equipment is designed to run in harsh environment conditions, such as those encountered in relaying buildings of very high voltage stations.

To this end, it is fitted with protections against electromagnetic disturbance (induced or radiated).

Although intended mainly for the field of energy, the DIP teleprotection equipment is also used in all applications where the following criteria are imperative:

• Very short transfer times.

• Optimum dependability and safety.

• Immunity to disturbance from the electric environment.

The DIP unit also supports:

• Information coding ensuring, on the one hand compatibility with the standard transmission medium, on the other hand immunity to disturbance encountered on it.

• Advanced decoding and processing of signals received, allowing accurate restitution of the information transmitted.

Page 37: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/44

4. DIP GENERAL PRESENTATION AND FEATURES

The DIP equipment is composed of a broad range of interfaces designed to meet different teleprotection needs.

Transmission in the digital or analog mode on different media is managed:

• Digital electrical medium (V11, G703)

• ‘Versatile’ optical medium with SFP module

• Single-mode optical medium (1310 nm, 1550 nm)

• Multimode optical medium (850 nm) compliant with recommendation IEEE C37-94

• Analog medium (single tone or dual tone coded version)

FIGURE 1 – DIP ENVIRONMENT

The DIP equipment also includes the following features:

• Possibility to transmit up to 8 independent commands in the digital mode and 4 commands in the analog mode

• Logical combination of inputs, type AND, OR, LOG (digital mode) for automation applications

• Indication of the status of alarms and teleprotection on the front face by LED, software

• Broad selection of communication interfaces

• Broad range of SFP optical modules

• Two contacts per command for input and output

• Dual tone coded analog mode

Page 38: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 10/44

• Two RS 232 access for connection to a PC or network access modem (1 local access et 1 remote access)

• Broad range of power supply boards for power supply voltages between 24 Vdc and 250 Vdc

• Acquisitions of commands by polarities between 24 and 250 Vdc in standard

• Possibility of power supply redundancy by adding a power supply board

• Possibility to supply the DIP by two different battery banks with identical or different voltages

• Modular design allowing hardware modification merely by changing boards

• Capacity to have an optical backup communication medium in the standby mode

• Permanent monitoring of the hardware and communication link

• Real-time measurement of the transfer time and BER (bit error rate) with indication when using the HMI software (digital mode only)

• Teleprotection fully programmable locally or remotely using the HMI software running on PC. This feature is available only in the digital mode. However, it is possible in all modes by using a management system (from version 2.x).

• Event and alarm recorder with a capacity of 1785 events each

• Time-stamping with a 1 ms accuracy for the event recorder

• Software upgrade by downloading from a PC

• Possibility to export the list of events, alarms and counter to spreadsheet compatible files (MS Excel® type)

4.1 Protection schemes managed

In all cases, the performance of a teleprotection link results from a compromise between transfer time, dependability and security. According to the protection scheme to which the equipment must be connected, one of the following three criteria must be chosen. To do this, the DIP digital teleprotection equipment has 3 types of application and 3 additional types in dual tone analog coded mode.

• Single tone analog mode:

− Permissive tripping (enhancing dependability)

− Blocking (enhancing transfer time)

− Direct tripping (enhancing security)

• Dual tone coded analog mode:

− Permissive tripping

− Blocking

− Direct tripping

− Reinforced blocking with more dependability

− Reinforced permissive tripping with more dependability

− Direct tripping reinforced with more security

The transfer times of reinforced protection schemes exceed those in single mode s.

• Digital mode:

− Permissive tripping (enhancing dependability)

− Blocking (enhancing transfer time)

− Direct tripping (enhancing security)

Page 39: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/44

4.2 Optional features

The following features may be supplied on analog and digital DIP equipment:

• IRIG-B interface to synchronize event logging on both sides of the link.

• Addition of an I/O board module providing access to combination logic features on the inputs and outputs.

• Possibility of acquisition of commands in dry loop with the optional filter board FI005 to be fitted on the SR200 board only.

• FI002 filter board providing reinforced protection against capacitive discharge.

• Redundancy of opto-electrical interface boards (digital mode only).

• Optional ME50 board, ensuring:

− Compatibility with an SNMP management system

− SNTP synchronization

− Access to reading the configuration using a standard browser

4.3 Allocation of logical input commands

Each physical input of the DIP can be allocated to a logical operation. Several physical inputs can hence be grouped to form a command transmitted online.

The combination authorized in the analog mode is:

OR: OR logic between 2 inputs

AND: AND logic between 2 inputs

The combination authorized in the digital mode is:

OR: OR logic between 2 inputs

AND: AND logic between 2 inputs

LOG: logical function as follows:

I1 I2 O1

1 0 1

0 1 0

0 0 Previous status

1 1 Previous status

TABLE 1– LOG FUNCTION

Position <1> corresponds to a closed contact (polarized or not according to the option), <0> to an open contact.

This feature is accessible when the number of inputs available exceeds the number of commands, as follows:

⇒ Version with 2 commands with one I/O board

⇒ Version with 4 commands with two I/O boards

Also, in these variants, the output command is activated on two independent relays.

Page 40: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 12/44

4.4 Alarms

In case of malfunction, the equipment can generate a major alarm or a minor alarm.

• Major Alarm

The equipment is no longer able to ensure a good level of dependability and security, the following actions are taken:

− Protection of command outputs, the equipment is unavailable

− Lamps lighting

− Record usable for information (history)

− Availability of two alarm loops

• Minor Alarm

The equipment is still able, in spite of the presence of a fault, to ensure a good level of dependability and security, the following actions are taken:

− Lamps lighting

− Record usable for information (history)

− Availability of two alarm loops

These alarms are detailed in the maintenance manual.

4.5 Auto-tests

The DIP teleprotection equipment includes many automated procedures controlling permanently its different functions (monitoring components internal to the CPU, monitoring the power supply, monitoring I/O boards,….).

The transmission link, whether digital or analog, is monitored permanently. The alarm conditions are met when the transmission medium is no longer able to ensure a good level of dependability and security.

Any operating fault triggers the following actions:

• Protection of command outputs

• Lamps lighting

• Record usable for information (history)

• Availability of alarm loops

4.6 Ease of use

The DIP teleprotection equipment was designed to facilitate startup, operation and maintenance of the links. Hence, it is fitted with two access points allowing to connect a PC to ensure, without any other instrument, all startup and maintenance operations.

4.6.1 Customization

Main features accessible in digital mode:

• Definition of identities and addresses of local and remote teleprotection

• Setting of the time and date of local and remote teleprotection

• Definition of the alarm trigger bit error rate

• Command prolongations in transmission and reception

• Types of configurable protection schemes

• Alarm customization

Page 41: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/44

Main features accessible in analog mode:

• Definition of identity and address of local teleprotection

• Setting of the time and date of local teleprotection

• Definition of a signal to noise ratio alarm. (analog dual tone only)

• Command prolongations in transmission and reception

• Configurable protection scheme type for each command

• Alarm customization

4.6.2 HMI monitoring features

For all versions:

• Number of commands transmitted and received

• Alarm status

• Inhibition status

• Status of locks and loopbacks

• Current parameters display

• Dated lists of 1785 events and 1785 alarms

For the digital version:

• Instant bit error rate

• Estimated transfer time

4.6.3 Features of tests and maintenance.

• For all versions:

− Operating commands

− Line locking

− Blocking of restitution relays

− Forcing of command transmission and restitution

• For the digital version only:

− Remote loopback

− Measurement of transfer time in the events list

− Optic electric communication interface redundancy

• For the analog single tone version only:

− Forcing of PLC commands

• For the analog dual tone coded version only:

− Forcing of tone transmissions one by one and of the outputs

− Monitoring feature (option)

• Monitoring by Web browser or SNMP based centralized system

When fitted, the optional board ME50 provides remote access to any DIP connected through an IP network.

Limitation to 250 DIP per PC (number of virtual ports under MS Windows®)

Page 42: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 14/44

4.7 Accessories

• Electrical V11 to optical e-terragridcom OCM converter.

This converter, robust in the environment of electrical stations, provides a link between a DIP in the digital mode and a remote transmission unit.

Therefore, it avoids some disturbance met in copper cable links.

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF LINK WITH E-TERRAGRIDCOM OCM

Page 43: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/44

5. DIGITAL MODE

5.1 Principle of digital transmission

The transmission principle used is that of permanent transmission of a digital frame corresponding to the guard status.

Closing one or several contacts changes this frame and transmits a command message.

The length of the messages depends on the teleprotection variant chosen. The messages are coded in 4, 8 or 16 words selected in a code. The code is calculated as to provide optimum security and dependability.

The transfer delay hence depends directly on the variant chosen.

5.2 Interfaces available in the digital mode

The architecture and principles used ensure the DIP digital / analog teleprotection equipment can adapt to different transmission media:

• Speed between 32 Kbps and 2048 Kbps

• V11/ RS422 interface, rate from 32 Kbps to 256 Kbps

• G703-1 interface at 64 Kbps

• G703-6 interface (E1) at 2048 Kbps. Impedance 75 or 120 ohms

• Interface for single mode optical fiber , rate 256 Kbps

• Interface for multimode optical fiber, IEEE C37-94. Rate nX64 Kbps with n=1 to 8

• Versatil Optical interface with interchangeable SFP module

Page 44: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 16/44

5.2.1 Digital interfaces managed

LINE

LINE

LINE

LINE

ETCD

ETCD

ETCD

ETCD

Clock

(Clock)

Clock

Clock

Clock

Clock

Clock

Clock

Clock

Clock

Optical fibre

Optical fibre

OPTICAL FIBRE

OPTICAL FIBRE

LINE

Optical fibre

Optical fibre

D0045FRb

FIGURE 3 – DIGITAL INTERFACES

NOTE: The V11 / X24 configuration allows running with a clock supplied by the

equipment (DCE mode). In each configuration, two DIP teleprotections can run together without the DCE equipment.

Page 45: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/44

5.2.2 IR185 optical fiber interface

This interface, compliant with recommendation IEEE C37.94, was developed for short links, e.g. a direct secured connection to a multiplexer. Typically, the link in a station between the DIP located in a relaying building and the transmission equipment located in the communication building.

The standardized connector is of the ST type, to be used with 62.5/125 µm multimode fiber with an 850nm wavelength.

The IEEE C37.94 protocol runs at 2 048 Kbits/s, twelve time slots (TS) of 64 Kbits/s each are available for a maximum transmission rate. In the DIP, this number is limited to 8.

A rotary switch selects the number of slots used for communication. Please note that the IR-185 boards uses eight slots maximum.

If N is the value on the coding wheel, the actual rate is Nx64kbps.

5.2.3 IR187 optical interfaces

This optical interface was developed to be able to use SFP modules. It broadens the range of use of the DIP. Just change the module according to the application required. Installation modifications are hence highly simplified.

The IR187 board can only be fitted in the latests AM170D rack.

The IR187 interface can be configured to use two types of protocol:

• Manchester 2 protocol

In this case, the interface is compatible with the IR182 board it can replace.

• C37.94 protocol

This setting is recommended for optical links between several DIP.

The IEEE C37.94 protocol runs at 2 048 Kbits/s, twelve time slots (TS) of 64 Kbits/s each are available for a maximum transmission rate. In the DIP, this number is limited to 8.

A rotary switch selects the number of TS used for communication.

Note: The IEEE C37.94 recommendation defines an optical interface standard between a teleprotection and a multiplexer.

The IR187 interface can be set to use the C37.94 protocol, but unlike the IR185 board, it is not strictly compatible with this standard in terms of optical and connector characteristics.

Page 46: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 18/44

5.2.4 SFP modules

The SFP module is a compact optical transceiver. It is fitted onto the IR187 board interchangeably to adapt to the needs of the application:

These modules, defined originally for high speed STM-1 and faster SDH digital transmissions, perfectly match the requirements of DIP applications. Two main types of SFP modules may be used:

• Unidirectional

It is the most current standard for applications in the energy sector. One fiber is used by transmission direction (2 fibers for one link).

D0640xxb

FIGURE 4 – UNIDIRECTIONAL MODULE

There are several types of modules according to the range to be reached:

• Multimode module (1300 and 1500 nm)

• Single mode module (850 nm)

• Bidirectional

A single fiber is used for both directions. Each communication direction uses a different wavelength.

D0641xxb

FIGURE 5 – BIDIRECTIONAL MODULE

Page 47: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/44

A new technology has emerged in the last few years covering two wavelengths carried by the fiber, in opposite directions. External WDM couplers (multiplexers), combining or separating the two wavelengths, are used at the ends. As the technology has evolved, passive external WDM couplers have been integrated to a standard optical transceiver interface.

By combining the transmission and reception functions in a single fiber, without external mixer filter, the bidirectional SFP module on a single fiber is a simple way of offering optical transmission while halving fiber wiring required.

FIGURE 6 – BIDIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION

For short distances, the wavelength for one transmission direction is 1310nm and 1550nm in the other direction.

For longer distances, the wavelength for one transmission direction is 1510nm and 1590nm in the other direction.

For a given link, the modules are paired, one per end, each transmitting in the wavelength chosen.

5.2.5 Path redundancy.

The DIP can toggle communication from the optical interface (IR187) to another digital interface (IR173, IR179 or IR180), according to the criteria defined by the user.

FIGURE 7 – REDUNDANCY DIAGRAM

Page 48: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 20/44

5.3 Optimizing the transmission medium

Digitizing the telecommunication networks for power distribution and carrying services optimizes exchanges of teleprotection messages, as they are transmitted as the other services of these systems.

On the other hand, in the principle chosen, the link transmits a frame permanently, even if there are no commands, allowing both teleprotection to communicate and exchange this information via service words.

The DIP can use an optical medium for the main path, and an electrical medium for the backup path.

To avoid routing error, 2 DIP with different address cannot communicate.

Similarly, over a link, one DIP shall be configured as master and the other as slave, avoiding untimely loopback.

5.4 Number of commands

The architecture of the DIP digital teleprotection equipment allows to transmit 2, 4 or 8 commands using standard boards. Regardless of the variant used, the different commands are independent, but could also be transmitted simultaneously.

5.5 Applications

Protection scheme customization is applied in group of 2 commands (1-2), (3-4), (5-6), (7-8). The application can be selected from the blocking, permissive or direct tripping.

5.6 Link control

The transmission medium is controlled permanently using a part of the frame transmitted (call service channel). This service channel allows teleprotection to exchange data on their respective status, and decide whether the link is able to perform its task. The local unit reflects the status remotely using the remote alarm feature. The transmission delay of the link is also controlled permanently by the service channel, by measuring on both sides the return time of a particular message from the opposite side.

The latter runs on any PC under Windows 2000 or XP, after connection to an appropriate connector on the DIP Teleprotection unit.

The HMI application provides to the operator an instant measurement of the bit error rate over the communication link.

Page 49: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/44

5.7 Maintenance and loopback

To control operation locally or remotely of the teleprotection unit, the operator can switch the unit into the maintenance mode and perform a local or remote loopback using the DIP human-machine interface:

• Local loopback can be used during transmission with a remote unit.

• Remote and local loopback are mutually exclusive. This means that if one is activated, the other is inaccessible.

• Commands can be forced with the HMI in local or remote mode.

LOCAL

LOOP

Tx

Rx

LOCAL

REMOTE

LOOP

REMOTE

Remote looping

command

Transmitterblocked or not

D0636 FRa

FIGURE 8 – LOOPBACK

This feature allows to check the entire transmission link.

Page 50: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 22/44

6. ANALOG MODE

6.1 Frequency coding of the single tone version

In the analog mode, a guard frequency is transmitted permanently when the DIP is idle.

When one or several commands are present at the input of the transmission unit, the guard frequency is stopped, and one or several command frequencies are transmitted on line.

IdleGuard frequency

Transmission of

2 commands

D0048 FRa

FIGURE 9 - TRANSMISSION – SINGLE TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND

The following table presents the frequency coding on line according to the status of the inputs:

Input command Frequency coding

Command 1 Fc1

Command 2 Fc2

Command 3 Fc3

Command 4 Fc4

Commands 1+2 Fc1+Fc2

Commands 1+3 Fc1+Fc3

Commands 1+4 Fc1+Fc4

Commands 2+3 Fc2+Fc3

Commands 2+4 Fc2+Fc4

Commands 3+4 Fc3+Fc4

Commands 1+2+3+4 Fc1+Fc2+ Fc3+Fc4

Commands 1+2+3 Fc1+Fc2+ Fc3

Commands 2+3+4 Fc2+ Fc3+Fc4

Commands 1+3+4 Fc1+ Fc3+Fc4

Commands 1+2+4 Fc1+ Fc2+Fc4

Link test Fv + 6 dB

Guard Fv

TABLE 2– CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES

Page 51: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/44

6.2 Frequency coding of the dual tone version

In the single tone mode, the command frequency is Fv and each command corresponds to a frequency Fci (i = 1 to 4):

F1 F6F4 F5F3F2 F8F7

DF

D0485ENa

FIGURE 10 - TRANSMISSION – DUAL TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND

The following table presents the commands frequency coding:

Input command Frequency coding

Commands 1 F1+F3

Commands 2 F2+F4

Commands 3 F1+F4

Commands 4 F2+F5

Commands 1+2 F1+F5

Commands 1+3 F3+F5

Commands 1+4 F2+F6

Commands 2+3 F1+F6

Commands 2+4 F3+F6

Commands 3+4 F4+F6

Commands 1+2+3+4 F5+F7

Commands 1+2+3 F1+F7

Commands 2+3+4 F4+F7

Commands 1+3+4 F3+F7

Commands 1+2+4 F2+F7

Link test F6+F7

Guard F8

TABLE 3 – CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES

Page 52: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 24/44

6.3 Description of the communication interface

Interface for 4-wire voice frequency transmission medium. For example, it may be a PLC, an analog channel on a multiplexer, a wired link, a leased line, a point to point radio link, etc.

FIGURE 11 – VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE

The voice frequency interface operates in a part of the audio frequency band at 4kHz, the signal is transported from the transmitter to the receiver via a telecommunication circuit.

6.4 Characteristics specific to the analog mode

6.4.1 Transmission medium (all versions)

The DIP teleprotection unit is designed to transmit low frequency signals over a 4-qire analog transmission medium with analog access to voice frequencies. The link is always bidirectional.

The architecture and principles used ensure the DIP system can be adapted to the different bandwidth constraints of conventional transmission media:

• 300 - 2400 Hz (cables)

• 300 - 3400 Hz (microwave, multiplexers, radio, etc.)

• 300 - 2000 and 300 - 3700 Hz (PLC)

• Several 1600Hz bands in the dual tone version (see section 8.8.3 )

6.4.2 Optimizing the single tone version

Using the DIP unit with PLC equipment (publication CEI 60495) allows to optimize the operation of the transmission medium:

• Optimizing the bandwidth

In the absence of commands, the link can transmit other signals (e.g. telephony or data). In this particular case, the Fv guard frequency can be the telephony signaling frequency of the telecommunication system, and hence can be generated by the latter. When a command is transmitted, the telephony transmission, calls and high frequency signals are interrupted to the benefit of the command frequency transmission.

• Optimizing power

On the other hand, a specific operating mode, called Advanced mode, allows to use all the power available of the PLC equipment to transmit teleprotection commands.

In this scheme, the level of the command transmitted to the PLC equipment depends on the number of commands to be transmitted simultaneously, to obtain the P.E.P level, on the R.F medium, equivalent to the maximum power level of the PLC equipment.

6.4.3 Number of commands – Single tone version

The architecture of the DIP equipment is such that standard boards may be used to supply configurations with 2 or 4 commands.

Two variants are available:

• Normal maintenance

Page 53: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/44

In this mode, commands are totally independent and can be transmitted simultaneously. The output level is shared between the command signals. As transmission is simultaneous, the level of each command signal is limited so that the sum is equal or below the admissible transmitted level.

• Enhanced mode

This mode, defined by a particular coding mode by algorithm, forces the command output signal to the maximum output power available. This solution is particularly suited to the PLC medium and links sensitive when the optimized SNR is reached.

The DIP transmits its command signal at the maximum output reference. In the case of two simultaneous commands, the level of each signal is reduced to avoid exceeding the maximum output reference.

This configuration returns automatically to the initial setting (maximum reference) when canceling the simultaneous condition.

With its 4 commands, the DIP unit is configured in a 2+2 operating mode. The 4 commands are distributed into 2 groups combined with a priority rule .

Each group observes the maximum automatic reference concept. The 2+2 rule of priority is designed for optimized signal transmission.

Rule of priority

Active command input Command transmitted Comment

1

2

1+2

1

2

1+2

Group A

3

4

3+4

3

4

3+4

Group B

1+3

1+4

2+3

2+4

1+2+3

2+3+4

1+2+3+4

1

1

2

2

1+2

2

1+2

Group A has priority over group B

Page 54: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 26/44

6.4.4 Link test

The operator can check the global operation of the link during operation, by pressing a push button or through the maintenance PC. This procedure allows to transmit a test message with loopback at the other end of the link.

This operation provides very fast checking of the transmission medium and the ‘transmitter’ and ‘receiver’ parts of the equipment.

This procedure can also be launched, automatically, by the equipment with a programmable periodicity (daily or hourly). This feature is programmed via the HMI application and associated with an alarm level.

In case of failure of the procedure (after three attempts), the equipment switches to the irreversible minor or major alarm condition according to the programming (fault lamps on and alarm loops activation).

The alarm is maintained until operator intervention. In case of minor alarm, the next link test (periodical or manual) can be performed, and then the minor alarm is maintained or not, according to the result.

T

R

T

R

Test

TestCPU CPU

FIGURE 12 – LINK TEST – ANALOG MODE

6.4.5 Unblocking feature

This function allows to send one of the 4 commands upon a guard frequency reception fault.

Triggering condition: a loss of the guard frequency or drop of its level above the programmed threshold and during a time longer than that selected, causes the transmission of a command calibrated on the output selected.

• Transmission time: adjustable from 5 to 100 ms in 1 ms steps.

• Trigger threshold: adjustable from 10 to 20 dB under the nominal guard level by steps of 0.1 dB.

• Command time adjustable from 30 to 500 ms per 1 ms steps.

6.4.6 Voltage presence

The voice frequency interface module provides an output (relay) contact closed as long as the DIP is powered on. This feature allows the communication equipment or protection automation system to be notified in case of loss of power supply of the teleprotection when the guard frequency is transmitted by the communication equipment.

The circuit for this contact is located in the connector of the communication interface.

6.4.7 External alarm input

The voice frequency interface board includes an opto-electronic input circuit activated by a voltage (48V nominal). This input can be configured by the HMI to trigger an alarm on the teleprotection equipment. This alarm, which can be minor or major, is activated after a user-set time (0 to 2.5 seconds per 100 ms steps).

For example, this feature allows the DIP to consider the interruption or lack of the power supply, as well as the dedicated alarms transmitted by the communication equipment.

The circuit for this input is located in the communication interface connector.

6.4.8 DIP connected to a PLC

This paragraph concerns only the single tone enhanced analog mode.

Page 55: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/44

6.4.8.1 Automatic maximum increase

When the DIP equipment is used in the enhanced mode with the PLC equipment, the command signal is set automatically to the maximum power available of the transmitter (the signals selected for the PLC are interrupted during the transmission of the command).

The use of the power supply of the 40 W (+ 46 dBm) PLC for the command, or 80 W (+ 49 dBm), in an enhanced mode ensures the best command transmission in unfavorable conditions (optimized Signal to Noise Ratio).

6.4.8.2 Operation

The 40 W optimized transmission power corresponds to the following data:

Active command input RF output signal per command

One command (group A or group B)

+46 dBm PLC P.E.P.

Two commands (in the same group)

+40 dBm PLC P.E.P. -6 dB

The 80 W optimized transmission power corresponds to the following data:

Active command input RF output signal per command

One command (group A or group B)

+49 dBm PLC P.E.P.

Two commands (in the same group)

+43 dBm PLC P.E.P. -6 dB

C1

C2

C3

C1

C1

C2C2 C3

P.E.P. limit

Command

input ON

R.F. output

(CPL)

Automatic power process

D0487FRa

FIGURE 13 - EXAMPLE OF AUTOMATIC POWER PROCESS

Page 56: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 28/44

6.5 Characteristics specific to the analog mode in the dual tone version

Teleprotection mode: teleprotection CODED

• 8 frequency tones

• Dual tone command (F1 to F7)

• F8 for the guard frequency (use of PLC signaling forbidden)

• Dual tone link test

• Teleprotection with 4 commands (6 types of application)

• Bandwidths 9 x 1600 Hz between 300 Hz and 3600 Hz

The level and time of the noise alarm, part of the decision process and measured by smoothening the decision filters, must be defined.

The delay of the blocking alarm, corresponding to a state of blocking of the decision algorithm (impossibility to recognize a command in bad line conditions), must be defined.

Page 57: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/44

7. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

A DIP Teleprotection unit is made of a rack, EUROPE type, 3 Units high, inside which the printed circuit boards supporting the components are placed (format 6 units, depth 220 mm)

The modules are connected by a back plane also including outlets allowing to insert connectors to the power supply, transmission and operation media.

D0051XXb

(3U)

132.5 mm

300 mm

or

316 mm

37.7 mm

37.7 mm

57.1 mm

FIGURE 14 – DIP RACK

Page 58: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 30/44

Different boards composing the DIP:

Name Function Position

AM170 (1) Rack with FB182 back plane with single power supply connector

AM170D Rack with FB182D back plane with two power supply connectors

UT148(1) CPU board 1

UT148D CPU board 1

SR114(1) Input-output board with 4 commands for 48 to 250 Vdc acquisition voltage. 2 / 3

SR114D Input-output board with 4 commands for 48 to 250 Vdc acquisition voltage. 2 / 3

SR115 Input-output board with 4 commands for 24 to 127 Vdc acquisition voltage. 2 / 3

SR116 Input-output board with 4 commands for 24 to 127 Vdc acquisition voltage. 2 / 3

SR200 Input-output board with 4 commands for 24 to 250 Vdc acquisition voltage. Enhanced restitution characteristics.

2 / 3

AL137(2) Power supply 48 V nominal input with standard, normally closed, alarm contacts 5 / 6 *

AL142(2) Power supply 48 V nominal input with normally open alarm contacts 5 / 6 *

AL139A(2) Power supply 110 V to 127 Vdc nominal input with standard, normally closed, alarm contacts 5 / 6 *

AL143(2) Power supply 110 V to 127 Vdc nominal input with normally open alarm contacts 5 / 6 *

AL139B(2) Nominal input power supply 220 to 250 Vdc 5 / 6 *

AL140(2) Nominal input power supply 24 Vdc 5 / 6 *

Digital communication interface

IR173_75 G703-6 interface (2 Mbps) Impedance 75 ohms On CPU

IR173_120 G703-6 interface (2 Mbps) Impedance 120 ohms On CPU

IR179 V11 interface (32 kbps to 512 kbps) On CPU

IR180 G703-1 codirectional interface (64 kbps) On CPU

IR185 Short distance optical fiber interface, C37.94 standard (λ = 850 nm, 62.5/125 µm), ST connectors. Rate Nx64kbps with N from 1 to 8.

4

IR187(3) Optical interface able to receive different types of SFP module. LC connector. Rate 256 kbps or Nx64kbps with N 1 to 8 according to use

4

Analog communication interface

IR183 Voice frequency interface. On CPU

Optional boards

IR184 IRIG-B interface board On CPU

FI002 Filter against capacitive discharge 2

ME50 RS232/IP converter, RJ45 LAN interface, SNMP management, configuration reading by web browser.

On CPU board

FI005 (4) Board allowing to acquire commands by dry loop instead of a voltage On SR200

TABLE 4 – DIP BOARDS

(1) Models reserved to France only.

(2) To increase dependability, two power supply modules can be used, with the same input voltages or different voltages.

(3) The IR187 board can only be fitted in the AM170D rack.

(4) Only on SR200 board.

Page 59: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/44

8. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS

8.1 Mechanical characteristics

Dimensions

Height 132 mm (3U)

Width 483 mm (19")

Depth 300 mm (behind the bracket)

Weight 7.6 kg

Cross-section of conductors on the connectors

AWG 20 to 22 (0.324 to 0.519 mm²)

Diameter of the access connector cable 8.2 mm maximum

Cable to connect to the terminal devices (command I/O)

0.08 < Cross-section < 2.5 mm²

Protection rating IP30

TABLE 5 – MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Page 60: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 32/44

8.2 Environmental characteristics

Climatic conditions

Nominal operating range

Temperature -10°C to +55°C

Relative humidity 90 % at 23°C

Operating limits

Temperature -40°C to +55°C

Relative humidity 95 % at 40°C

Limit storage conditions

Temperature -40°C to +85°C

Relative humidity 100 % at 23°C no condensation

Product safety

Generic standard EN 60255-5 (2000) / EN60255-27(2005)

Teleprotection standard CEI 60834-1 (1999) / EN 60834-1 (2000)

insultation resistance > 30.104 MΩ / 500 VDC

Dielectric tests at 50 Hz 2.5 kV on I/O commands

1 kV on the communication link

Impulse withsdtand level ± 5 kV on I/O commands

Earth continuity < 22 mΩ

EMC requirements

Compliance with IEC recommendations

Teleprotection standard CEI 60834-1 (1999) / EN 60834-1 (2000)

Generic immunity (industrial) CEI 61000-6-2 (2005)

Generic transmission (industrial) CEI 61000-6-4 (2006)

Generic immunity (station and substation environment)

CEI/TS 61000-6-5 (2001)

Electromagnetic compatibility requirements (tests)

Static discharge CEI 61000-4-2(2001) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-2 (1996)

Radiated magnetic field CEI 61000-4-3 (2006) Level 3

Fast transient bursts CEI 61000-4-4 (2004) Level 4 / CEI 60255-22-4 (2002) Level B

Surge immunity CEI 61000-4-5(2005) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-5 (2002)

Conducted electromagnetic field CEI 61000-4-6(2006) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-6 (2001)

Magnetic field CEI 61000-4-8 (2001) Level 5

Pulse magnetic field CEI 61000-4-9 (2001) Level 5

Voltage drops, short voltage interruptions and variations

CEI 61000-4-29 (2000)

Oscillatory waves CEI 61000-4-12(2006) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-1 (2007)

Conducted disturbance common mode CEI 61000-4-16(2002) Level 4 / CEI 60255-22-7 (2003)

TABLE 6 – ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS

Page 61: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/44

8.3 Electrical characteristics of the power supply

Nominal voltage 24 VDC 48 VDC 48/60 VDC 110/127 VDC 220/250 VDC

Operating range (Vdc) 18 to 30 36 to 60 36 to 72 80 to 160 160 to 300

Fuses 3.15 AT / 250 V

Redundant power supply possibility

2 separate accesses

Nominal consumption 7.5 W

Maximum absorbed power < 15 W

Maximum current at power on < 15 A (50µs ≤ t ≤ 1.5 ms

< 8 A (1.5 ms ≤ t ≤ 500 ms)

Frequency offset authorized between 100 Hz and 600 Hz

< 1.5 V peak to peak

Variations likely to be overlaid on top

± 20 V max in amplitude

Maximum duration: 1 s

Fleeting power cut < 50 ms / 500 ms

Re-injected noise < 3 mV psophometric

< 6 mV peak to peak

TABLE 7 – POWER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS

8.4 Characteristics of the IRIG-B interface

IRIG-B format B12x interface (modulated),

200-04 Standard,

Input impedance 4.7 kΩ at 1000 Hz,

Modulation ratio: 3:1 to 6:1,

Peak-to-peak input signal: 100 mV to 10 V.

Page 62: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 34/44

8.5 Operating characteristics

General

Number of commands transmitted 2 or 4 with an I/O board, up to 8 with a second board

Particularity All commands are independent and can also be used simultaneously

Command acquisition

Physical input 4 per I/O board, up to 8 with 2 boards

Mode Per voltage from 24 to 250 VDC

In dry loop option with the SR200 board

Decoupling Opto-electronic

Input filter 0 to 100 ms selectable by the HMI, 1 ms step

Except for the single tone filter version from 0 to 3mS

Value recommended 1mS

Validation times Analog version only: from 1 ms to 5 ms (1 ms step) selectable by the HMI

Input combination logic AND, OR, LOG possibility between 2 inputs

Command holding time (default minimum or maximum time in calibrated mode) (2)

For the digital transmission 0 or 20 to 200 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI

For the analog transmission 20 to 500 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI

Command restitution (according to type of SR board)

SR11x SR200

Mode By contacts (static and electromechanical relay)

Number of contacts 4 contacts in operation, up to 8 with two boards

Contacts operating in pairs if the input combination logic is configured.

Maximum voltage 290 Vdc 300 Vdc

Maximum current 2 A 5A

Cut-off power 120 W 650 W (1)

Short-circuit current 100 A / 30 ms

Contact closing time Programmable

Restitution holding time (minimum) (2)

For the digital output 0 to 3 s. Either 0 to 200 ms by 1 ms step , either 200 ms to 3 s per 10 ms step with the HMI

For the dual tone analog output 0 to 3 s. Either 0 to 200 ms by 2 ms step, either 200 ms to 3 s per 20 ms step with the HMI

For the single tone analog output 0 to 500 ms in 1 ms steps

(1) Within the limit of maximum voltage or current. Examples: 5A under 127 Vdc or 2A under 300

Vdc (2) The holding times indicated are valid from version 2.2. For previous versions refer to Table 7

Page 63: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/44

Auxiliary relays

Mode By contacts (solid state relay)

Number of contacts 1 contact in operation

At least 2 auxiliary contacts per command (1 Tx and 1 Rx)

Up to 4 auxiliary contacts per command (2 Tx and 2 Rx) with the input logic.

Characteristics identical to command restitution

Alarm features

Interface Lamps and relays

Number of contacts 2 contacts for the minor alarm.

2 contacts for the major alarm

Type of contacts Normally closed (by default).

Normally open in option for 48/60Vdc and 110/127 Vdc

Maximum voltage 290 VDC

Maximum current 5 A

Cut-off power 100 W

Short-circuit current 100 A / 30 ms

Delay on command relay alarm 0 s / 2.5 s / 5 s / 10 s configurable by HMI

Operator assistance

Operations Alarm lamps and loops

Maintenance Connection of a PC for all startup and maintenance operations

Histories 1785 time-stamped events 1785 time-stamped alarms Resolution = 1 ms between 2 events or alarms

TABLE 8 – OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

Page 64: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 36/44

For versions before 2.2

Versions 1.x Version 2.1

Command holding (default minimum time)

Digital mode 0 or 20 to 250 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI

Dual tone analog mode NA 0 to 500 ms in 1 ms steps

Single tone analog mode 0 to 500 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI

Restitution holding (minimum time)

Digital mode 0 to 250 s in 1 ms steps

Dual tone analog mode NA 0 to 3 s. Either 0 to 200 ms by 2 ms step either 200 ms to 3 s per 20 ms step with the HMI

Single tone analog mode 0 to 500 ms in 1 ms steps

TABLE 9 – CHARACTERISTICS OF PREVIOUS VERSIONS

Page 65: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/44

8.6 Characteristics of digital transmission

Digital medium G703.1 / G703.6 / V11 / Optical

Transmission speed 32 Kbit/s to 2048 Kbit/s

Connector SUB-D 15 pin, shielded

Impedance G703-6 120 Ω or 75 Ω

Insulation By translator for G703

By optocouplers for V11

Optical characteristics IR187 board with SFP module

See following paragraph dedicated to SFP modules

Multimode IR185

Compliance IEEC C.37.94 yes

Transmission speed n x 64 kbps (1 ≤ n ≤ 8)

Optical power at 820 nm 50 µm fibers Nominal -19 dBm Minimum -23 dBm

Optical power at 820 nm 62 µm fibers Nominal -16 dBm Minimum -19 dBm

Receiver sensitivity - 30 dBm

TABLE 10 – DIGITAL TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS

Page 66: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 38/44

8.7 Characteristics of SFP modules

8.7.1 Single mode unidirectional modules

Type of interface S1.1 L1.2e U1.2e

Wavelength (nm) 1261 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580

Type of fiber SM

Average output power (dBm) -14 to -8 -3 to +2 +5 to +8

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -34 -34 -45

Max acceptable power at receiver input -8 -8 -10

Connector Double LC

Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/nm) NA NA 4800

Maximum theoretical distance * (km) 30 100 240

TABLE 11 – CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES

8.7.2 Single mode bidirectional modules

Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3

Type of interface BIDI-180-1

BIDI-180-2

BIDI-1120-1

BIDI-1120-2

BIDI-1200-1

BIDI-1200-2

Tx wavelength (nm) 1310 1550 1510 1590 1510 1590

Rx wavelength (nm) 1550 1310 1590 1510 1590 1510

Type of fiber SM

Average output power (dBm) -2 to -3 -2 to -3 -2 to -3 -2 to -3 1 to 5 1 to 5

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -34 -34 -34 -34 -45 -45

Max acceptable power at receiver input -8 -8 -8 -8 -10 -10

Connector LC

Maximum possible chromatic dispersion (ps/nm)

NA

Maximum theoretical distance * (km) 80 120 200

TABLE 12 – CHARACTERISTICS OF BIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES

8.7.3 Multimode unidirectional module

Type of interface MM-20

Wavelength (nm) 830 to 860

Type of fiber MM

Average output power (dBm) -7 to -2

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -16

Connector LC

Maximum theoretical distance * (km) 1

TABLE 13 – CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL MM MODULES

* This distance is given for information, depending on the quality of the facility. Only a measurement of the optical budget allows giving a precise evaluation.

Page 67: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/44

8.8 Characteristics of voice frequency transmission

8.8.1 General characteristics

Access medium

Line impedance 600 Ω or high impedance (selection by jumper)

Return loss 20 dB minimum over 600 Ω

Galvanic insulation Translator

Connector SUB-D 15 pin, shielded

Sender

Precision of frequencies transmitted 1 Hz

Transmission level -30 dBm to +6 dBm

Maximum global output level (4 commands) +6 dBm

Pre-emphasis Up to 14 dB between two signals

Signals non valid out of band < 50 dB signals transmitted

Receiver

Levels acceptable -40 dBm to 0 dBm

Adjustment 1 for the guard frequency and 1 for commands

Acceptable difference between command and guard frequency 0 to 14 dB

TABLE 14 – GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VOICE FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION

8.8.2 Band sharing - Single tone version

The following table presents the allocation of frequencies in single tone bandwidths.

2 commands

Channel bandwidth 300 - 3400 Hz 300 - 2400 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz

Guard frequency band (Rx) 3500 / 3800 Hz 2400 / 2650 Hz 2000 / 2300 Hz 3600 / 3800 Hz

Guard frequency (Tx) 3600 Hz 2600 Hz 2240 Hz 3680 Hz

Command 1 frequency 900 Hz 400 Hz 480 Hz 480 Hz

Command 2 frequency 2100 Hz 1200 Hz 1120 Hz 1120 Hz

4 commands

Channel bandwidth 300 - 3400 Hz 300 - 2400 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz

Guard frequency band (Rx) 3500 / 3800 Hz 2400 / 2650 Hz 2000 / 2300 Hz 3600 / 3800 Hz

Guard frequency (Tx) 3680 Hz 2600 Hz 2240 Hz 3680 Hz

Command 1 frequency 640 Hz 400 Hz 480 Hz 480 Hz

Command 2 frequency 1280 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz

Command 3 frequency 1920 Hz 1200 Hz 1120 Hz 1120 Hz

Command 4 frequency 2560 Hz 1600 Hz 1440 Hz 1440 Hz

TABLE 15 – BAND SHARING – SINGLE TONE VERSION

Page 68: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 40/44

8.8.3 Band sharing – Dual tone version

The following tables present the bandwidths and spectral distribution of frequencies used in the dual tone version.

Band F8 Bandwidth

1 1741 300-1900

2 1820 400-2000

3 2110 670-2260

4 2295 850-2450

5 2479 1040-2630

6 2664 1220-2810

7 2848 1400-3000

8 3033 1590-3180

9 3429 1990-3580

TABLE 16 – DUAL TONE VERSION FREQUENCIES

Frequencies

(Hz) Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 6 Band 7 Band 8 Band 9

F1 448 527 818 1002 1187 1371 1556 1741 2136

F2 633 712 1002 1187 1371 1556 1741 1925 2321

F3 818 897 1187 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 2505

F4 1002 1081 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 2294 2690

F5 1187 1266 1556 1741 1925 2110 2294 2479 2875

F6 1371 1451 1741 1925 2110 2295 2479 2664 3059

F7 1556 1635 1925 2110 2294 2479 2664 2848 3244

F8 1741 1820 2110 2294 2479 2664 2848 3033 3429

Link test F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7

TABLE 17 – FREQUENCIES AND BANDWIDTH (DUAL TONE VERSION)

Page 69: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/44

9. PERFORMANCE

9.1 Digital interfaces

9.1.1 Maximum transfer time according to transmission speed

Junction type Operation mode 4 Commands 8 Commands

G703 64 kbps

Blocking 5.5 ms 7.5 ms

Permissive 6.5 ms 9.5 ms

Direct tripping 8.0 ms 12.0 ms

V11 256 kbps

Blocking 3.0 ms 3.5 ms

Permissive 3.5 ms 4.0 ms

Direct tripping 4.0 ms 5.0 ms

G703.6 – 2048 kbps

Blocking 3.0 ms 3.5 ms

Permissive 3.0 ms 3.5 ms

Direct tripping 3.0 ms 3.5 ms

Optical link IR182/IR187

Blocking 3.0 ms 3.5 ms

Permissive 3.5 ms 4.0 ms

Direct tripping 4.0 ms 5.0 ms

TABLE 18 – MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION TIMES FOR ELECTRICAL AND IR187 BOARDS

NOTE: The times indicated correspond to a configuration with input filter 1ms activated and latest I/O board SR200

9.1.2 Transfer time according to the IEEE C37-94 protocol

C37.94 interface Rotary switch position 8 T0 Max. (ms)

Permissive 3,5

Blocking 3,0

Direct 3,5

TABLE 19 – MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION TIME FOR THE IR185 & IR187 BOARD WITH MUX

NOTE: The times indicated correspond to a configuration with input filter 1ms activated and latest I/O board SR200

9.1.3 Security

The following table indicates the values of dependability and security according to the protection mode with 4 commands and a speed of 64 kbps.

Protection mode Security (Puc) TEB = 0.5

(worst case)

Blocking < 2E-7

Permissive tripping 6E-14

Direct tripping 1E-20

Page 70: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 42/44

9.1.4 Dependability

Protection mode Dependability (Pmc)

TEB = 1E-3

Blocking 1E-30

Permissive tripping 1E-35

Direct tripping 1E-19

9.2 Analog interface – Single tone version

9.2.1 Transmission time

For each application, the two times indicated are expressed in milliseconds, and with 6 dB boost – without 6 dB boost respectively (in normal mode).

BANDWIDTH OPERATION

Command channel

Guard frequency

Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping

2 cmds 4 cmds 2 cmds 4 cmds 2 cmds 4 cmds

300-3400 3600 Hz 7 - 7 7 - 8 8 - 9 9 - 10 11 - 12 14 - 15

300-2400 2540 Hz 10 - 10 11 - 12 13 - 13 13 - 14 18 - 18 19 - 20

300-2000 2240 Hz 10 - 10 11 - 12 13 - 13 14 - 15 18 - 18 19 - 20

300-2000 3680 Hz 10 - 10 11 - 12 13 - 13 14 - 15 18 - 18 19 - 20

TABLE 20 – TRANSMISSION TIME SINGLE TONE VERSION

NOTE: The times indicated correspond to a configuration with input filter deactivated.

9.2.2 Security (bandwidth 300-3 400 Hz)

The values indicated in the following table correspond to the worst SNR.

Protection mode 2 commands 4 commands

Blocking <6.10-4

<3.10-4

Permissive tripping <6.10-6

<6.10-6

Direct tripping <1.10-11

<6.10-11

9.2.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz)

The values indicated in the following table correspond to a 6 dB S/N ratio.

Protection mode 2 commands 4 commands

Blocking <4.10-4

<6.10-4

Permissive tripping <7.10-4

<8.10-4

Direct tripping <8.10-4

<8.10-4

Page 71: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/44

9.3 Analog interface – Dual tone version

9.3.1 Transmission time

BANDWIDTH STANDARD OPERATION

Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping

300-1900 Hz 10 ms

BANDWIDTH REINFORCED OPERATION

Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping

300-1900 Hz 11 ms 12 ms 13 ms

TABLE 21 – TRANSMISSION TIME DUAL TONE VERSION

9.3.2 Security (bandwidth 300- 1900 Hz)

Security (for the worst SNR)

Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping

<1.10-5

<1.10-5

<1.10-9

9.3.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300 - 1900 Hz)

Dependability (for S/N = 6 dB)

Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping

See curves below

Page 72: DIP User Manual

General characteristics

DIP/EN IT/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 44/44

Page 73: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23 e-terragridcom DIP

INSTALLATION

Page 74: DIP User Manual
Page 75: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/38

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7

2. SHIPPING 8

2.1 Packaging 8

2.2 Storage 8

2.3 Parts list 8

3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 10

4. INSTALLATION 11

4.1 Description 11

4.2 Implementation of the boards 11

4.2.1 Basic configuration 11

4.2.2 Adding additional boards to the rack 12

4.2.3 Optional boards 13

5. POWER SUPPLY BOARDS 14

5.1 Range of Vdc values of power supply boards 14

5.2 Constraints relative to the Vdc input values 14

5.3 Power supply and consumption 14

6. CONNECTION 15

6.1 Rear connectors 15

6.2 I /O wiring of terminal blocks 16

6.2.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks 16

6.2.2 I/O pin-out of terminal blocks 17

6.2.3 Allocation of logical input commands 18

6.2.4 Examples of wiring 20

6.3 Wiring alarms and copy contacts 20

6.3.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks 20

6.3.2 Pin-out of the copy and alarm outputs on the terminal blocks 21

6.3.3 Particular case of the AL142 and AL143 boards. 22

6.3.4 Allocation of copy outputs 22

6.3.5 Recommendation 23

6.4 Power supply wiring 24

6.4.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks 24

6.4.2 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170 rack 24

6.4.3 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170D rack 24

6.5 Access port for line connection support 25

Page 76: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 2/38 e-terragridcom DIP

6.5.1 Description of the connectors 25

6.5.2 Pin-out of the V11 / X24 - IR179 interface 26

6.5.3 Pinout of the G703-1 (64 kbps) - IR180 codirectional interface 27

6.5.4 Pinout of the G703-6 (2 Mbps) - IR173 interface 28

6.5.5 Voice frequency (analog mode) - IR183 interface 29

6.6 Optical fiber access port 30

6.7 Standard HMI access port (PC connection) 30

6.8 Optional RJ45 HMI access port 31

6.9 IRIG-B interface port 31

6.10 FI002 wiring 32

7. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 33

8. APPENDIX 34

8.1 AM170 - Location of the terminal blocks 34

8.2 AM170D - Location of the terminal blocks – Double power supply version 35

8.3 Connector kits delivered with the equipment 36

8.4 Connection of the 2-command version 37

8.5 Connections of the 4-command version with 1 I/O board 37

8.6 Connections of the 4-command version with 2 I/O boards 38

8.7 Connection of the 8-command version 38

Page 77: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/38

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 – DIP RACK 11

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF PLUG-IN CARD POSITIONS 12

FIGURE 3 – LOCATION OF CHILD BOARDS ON THE CPU BOARD 13

FIGURE 4 - AM170 CONNECTORS AT THE BACK 15

FIGURE 5 - AM170DCONNECTORS AT THE BACK 15

FIGURE 6 – 10 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR 17

FIGURE 7 – PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCK TOOL 17

FIGURE 8 – 11 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR 20

FIGURE 9 - AM170D WIRING OF TWO POWER SUPPLIES FOR A SINGLE SOURCE 25

FIGURE 10 – PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE 26

FIGURE 11 – PINOUT OF THE G703.1 INTERFACE 27

FIGURE 12 – PINOUT OF THE G703.6 2 MBIT/S IR173 INTERFACE 28

FIGURE 13 – PINOUT OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE 28

FIGURE 14 – PINOUT OF THE ANALOG INTERFACE 29

FIGURE 15 – DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE FRONT 30

FIGURE 16 – DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR AT THE BACK 31

FIGURE 17 – RJ45 PORT 31

FIGURE 18 - AM170 - CONNECTORS AT THE BACK 34

FIGURE 19 - AM170D - CONNECTORS AT THE BACK 35

FIGURE 20 – AM170 KIT 36

FIGURE 21 – AM170D KIT 36

FIGURE 22 – CONNECTIONS OF THE TWO-COMMAND VERSION 37

FIGURE 23 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 1 I/O BOARD 37

FIGURE 24 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 2 I/O BOARDS 38

FIGURE 25 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 8-COMMAND VERSION 38

Page 78: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 4/38 e-terragridcom DIP

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 1 – LIST OF PARTS IN THE UNIT 8

TABLE 2 – BOARDS AVAILABLE 9

TABLE 4 – LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS ON THE P10, P11, P12 AND P13 TERMINAL BLOCKS 18

TABLE 6 – LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS OF TERMINAL BLOCKS P14, P15 AND P16 21

TABLE 7 – PINOUT OF ALARM TERMINAL BLOCKS P16 22

TABLE 9 – PINOUT OF THE P17 TERMINAL BLOCK 24

TABLE 10 – PINOUT OF THE MAIN & AUXILIARY TERMINAL BLOCK 24

TABLE 11 – PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE 26

TABLE 12 – CONNECTION OF THE G703-1 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE 27

TABLE 13 – CONNECTION OF THE G703-6 IR 173 INTERFACE 28

TABLE 14 – CONNECTION OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE 29

TABLE 15 – CONNECTION OF THE VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE 29

TABLE 16 – COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS 34

TABLE 17 – OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE 34

TABLE 18 – COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS 35

TABLE 19 – OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE 35

Page 79: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/38

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS

A 19/10/2000 Original issue

B 18/04/2001 Added the optical interface

C 04/10/2001 Added the grounding recommendation

D11 02/06/2004 ALSTOM – Added the analog part

E111 14/11/2007 New structure. New writing

F11 11/02/2008 Minor corrections

A22 15/09/2009 Software version 2.2

A23 01/06/2010 Minor corrections, added SR200 I/O interface, IR187 optical interface

NOTE: As of revision C, the document numbering has changed in compliance with ALSTOM standards, however the document index was incremented to allow better monitoring.

Page 80: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 6/38 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 81: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/38

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP/EN SS/A23 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.

(1) As per the option chosen

Page 82: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 8/38 e-terragridcom DIP

2. SHIPPING

2.1 Packaging

The packaging of the DIP includes:

• The DIP.

• A set of connectors, including small size tools (x 5) to insert the wiring.

• The reports on tests performed in the factory.

The DIP digital teleprotection equipment is made of a frame designed to host plug-in boards. This frame is designed to be located inside a standard 19-inch cabinet with fastening by the front face. The equipment is packaged and grouped in a standard box suited for transport.

Each box is marked on the outside with the serial number of the equipment to avoid opening when shipping several units in a same delivery.

The total weight of the equipment is about: 8 kg.

2.2 Storage

If the equipment is not installed within the weeks after shipped from the factory, it should be removed from its packaging before being stored, preferably in a shop. The equipment should be installed and powered on when intended to be stored for long periods (several months).

The temperature limits for transport and storage are -40°C to +85°C.

2.3 Parts list

The following table indicates the different components, or options, of a unit according to the variant chosen:

EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS

Variant 2 or 4 commands (3)

Variant 8 commands

3U rack AM170 (4) or AM170D 1

CPU board UT 148 (4) or UT148D 1

Terminal blocks 9 (5)

Line connection (female connector 15 pins) 1

CP connection (female connector DB 9 pins or RJ45 at the front (option)

1

Power supply board ALxxx (1) 1 or 2 (2)

I/O board SRxxx (1) 1 or 2 (3) 2

Digital communication interface IRxxx (1) 1 (DIP digital version)

Optical communication interface IR182, IR185 or IR187 1 (DIP optical fiber version)

Voice frequency interface IR183 1 (DIP analog version)

Filter board FI002 1 for the 2 or 4 command variant only (option)

TABLE 1 – LIST OF PARTS IN THE UNIT

(1) Refer to the list of boards available in table 2 below.

(2) 2 boards if redundant power supply.

(3) Depends on the contact diagram selected.

(4) Models reserved to RTE (France)

(5) 8 only with the AM170 frame

Page 83: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/38

Category and name of the board

Function Comment

Power supply boards

AL137 / AL142 (1) Power supply 48 / 60 Vdc Input 36 to 72 Vdc

AL139A / AL143 (1)

Power supply 110 / 127 Vdc Input 80 to 160 Vdc

AL139B Power supply 220 / 250 Vdc Input 160 to 300 Vdc

AL140 Power supply 24 Vdc Input 18 to 30 Vdc

I/O boards

SR114 / SR114D Nominal I/O 48 to 250 Vdc Command input 30 to 300 Vdc

SR115 Nominal I/O 24 to 60 Vdc Command input 18 to 72 Vdc

SR116 Nominal I/O 48 to 127 Vdc Command input 36 to 152 Vdc

SR200 Nominal I/O 24 to 250 Vdc Command input 18 to 300 Vdc

Dry loop I/O on option With FI005 board

Communication interface

IR173_75 G703-6 (E1) – 75 ohms Digital mode (256 kbps)

IR173_120 G703-6 (E1) – 120 ohms Digital mode (256 kbps)

IR179 V11 / X24 RS422 Digital mode (32 kbps to 256 kbps)

IR180 G703-1 co-directional Digital mode (64 kbps)

IR182-1310 Single mode optical fiber (1310 nm) Optical fiber mode

IR182-1550 Single Mode optical fiber (1550 nm) Optical fiber mode

IR185 Multimode optical fiber (850 nm) Optical fiber mode C37.94

IR187 ‘Versatile’ optical fiber with SFP module All optical modes

IR183 Voice frequency interface Analog mode

Optional features

ME50 RS232/IP converter, RJ45 LAN interface, SNMP management, configuration reading by web browser.

Child board of the UT148D

IR184 IRIG-B synchronization interface IRIG-B 12x format Standard 200-04 Input impedance 4.7 kΩ at 1000 Hz Modulation ratio 3:1 to 6:1 Peak to peak amplitude input signal: 100 mV to 10 V

FI002 Filter against capacitive discharge 2 or 4 commands only

FI005 Child board allowing to acquire commands by dry loop instead of a voltage

With SR200 board only

TABLE 2 – BOARDS AVAILABLE

(1) Alarm loop relays are fitted on the power supply boards. In standard these contacts

are normally closed, in option these contacts are normally open on the AL142 and AL143 boards.

Page 84: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 10/38 e-terragridcom DIP

3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Operating limit temperatures: -40°C to +70°C

Maximum relative humidity at 23°C: 90 %

These units are designed to be installed in premises protected from the rain.

Page 85: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/38

4. INSTALLATION

4.1 Description

The rack dimensions comply with the EUROPE type 19-inch standard, 3 units high as per the DIN 41494 standard.

The latter is designed to be installed in bays or boxes. The only support and fastening points are located on the front face of the racks, on drilled angle pieces.

4.2 Implementation of the boards

With its modular design, the DIP is available on several versions: analog, digital, 2, 4 or 8 commands, etc.

Optional boards are also managed.

The different configurations of the equipment are created by adding optional boards onto the basic configuration.

1 or 2 AI13x power supply boards

according to the option chosen

Flap

D0052FRc

(3U)

132.5 mm

300 mm

or

316 mm

37.7 mm

37.7 mm

57.1 mm

RS232C connectorOptional optical

interface

FIGURE 1 – DIP RACK

The UT 148, I/O boards type SRxxx and FI002, 220 mm long and 6U wide, are plugged and locked horizontally on the left-hand part of the rack. (positions 1 to 3).

Power supply boards of the ALxxx type and optical interfaces IR182, IR185 or IR187 are plugged and locked vertically in the right-hand part of the rack (positions 4 to 6).

4.2.1 Basic configuration

It is made of:

− 1 UT148 or UT148D CPU board in position 1.

− 1 I/O board (1) in position 3.

− 1 power supply board (1) in position 5.

(1) See table 2 List of boards available.

Page 86: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 12/38 e-terragridcom DIP

The following figure shows examples of board positions in the rack:

IR18

5

AL

xxx

SRxxx board

UT 148 board

Version with 4 commands,

or 2 commands with combination logic

Optical interface

IR18

2

D0494FRb

AL

xx

x

SRxxx board

IR183 interface

UT 148 board

Version with 4 commands,

analog with combination logic

SRxxx board

SRxxx boardVersion with 8 commands,

or 4 commands with combination logicOptical interface

UT 148 board ALx

xx

AL

xxx

SRxxx board

SRxxx board

IR183 interfaceUT 148 board

FI002 board

Analog version with 4 commands,

or 2 commands with combination logic

with filtering interface and

redundant power supply

AL

xxx

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF PLUG-IN CARD POSITIONS

4.2.2 Adding additional boards to the rack

According to the configuration required, the following boards may be added:

• 1 second I/O board (SRxx) in position 2 in the 4-command version to extend the number of outputs or supply the combination logic on inputs.

• 1 communication interface board selected among:

- Digital interface (V11, G703-1 or G703-6) installed as child board on the CPU board. (see figure 3)

- Optical fiber interface board (IR182, IR185 or IR187) installed in position 4

- Analog interface IR183 installed as child board on the CPU board

Page 87: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/38

D0053 frb

ME50

IR xxx

Communication interface board

IR184

Optional IRIG-B interface board

FIGURE 3 – LOCATION OF CHILD BOARDS ON THE CPU BOARD

4.2.3 Optional boards

The following boards may be added as an option:

• 1 redundant power supply board in position 4.

• 1 IRIG_B interface (IR184) installed as child board on the CPU board.

• 1 LAN, ME50 interface as child board on the CPU board.

• 1 I/O board in position 2 in the 4-command version to extend the number of outputs or supply the combination logic on inputs.

• 1 filtering board FI002 in position 2. In this case, the equipment is limited to 4 or 2 with input logic.

• 1 impedance adaptation board FI003 fitted on the SR200 board.

• 1 board allowing acquisition of commands in dry loop FI005 fitted on the SR200 board.

Page 88: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 14/38 e-terragridcom DIP

5. POWER SUPPLY BOARDS

FOR POWERING ON, ACTIVATE THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD USING THE SWITCH ON THE FRONT FACE OF THE ALxxx (FOR THE LOCATION, REFER TO THE APPENDIX OF THE COMMISSIONING MANUAL).

5.1 Range of Vdc values of power supply boards

The DIP digital teleprotection equipment is supplied in direct current by 1 or 2 independent power supply boards.

The power supply boards are available in several versions covering a broad range of nominal input voltages.

The following table specifies the nominal voltage as well as the power supply range matching each power supply board:

BOARD Nominal voltage

Vdc

Min voltage

Vdc

Max voltage

Vdc

AL137 / AL142 48 – 60 36 72

AL139A / AL143 110 – 127 80 160

AL139B 220 – 250 160 300

AL140 24 18 30

TABLE 3 – RANGE OF VDC VALUES OF POWER SUPPLY BOARDS

The power supply modules are protected by 3.15 AT / 250 V fuses.

THE INPUT VOLTAGE OF THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD MUST COMPLY WITH THE RANGE OF VALUES MANAGED.

5.2 Constraints relative to the Vdc input values

The Vdc input signal applied must comply with the following rules:

Alternate frequency component above or equal to 100 Hz: 0.12 Un peak to peak.

Input voltage variation:

⇒ ± 20 V max in amplitude

⇒ 10 ms max for the duration

⇒ 100 V/ms max slope

5.3 Power supply and consumption

The DIP digital Teleprotection unit must be supplied by a power supply board compatible with the Vdc input values complying with the constraints described above. It may be referenced to the mechanical ground of the rack or not.

Actuate the switch present on the power supply board to power on the teleprotection.

In case of redundant power supply, two different sources may be used, with a different voltage level (e.g. 48 Vdc and 125 Vdc or any other combination).

Consumption of a unit fully equipped at nominal voltage is below 20W.

Idle consumption (without command) is 7 W.

Page 89: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/38

6. CONNECTION

To meet safety requirements as well as the EMC specifications announced, the protection conductor terminal (ground) at the back of the DIP unit must be connected to a grounding bar, through the shortest possible path.

A flat braid in tinned copper with a cross-section of 12mm x 1mm and a length of 30cm is supplied to this effect with the equipment. This braid must be connected to one of the two M5 studs located at the back of the DIP unit.

SAFETY OF THE EQUIPMENT DEPENDS ON ITS CONNECTION TO THE PROTECTION CONDUCTOR (GROUND).

THE LEVEL OF EMC PROTECTION IS RELATED DIRECTLY TO THE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE GROUNDING CONNECTION. ANY DIFFERENCE MAY HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON THE PROTECTION.

When the DIP commands electromechanical relays, these should be fitted with free wheel diodes at the coil terminals.

6.1 Rear connectors

There are two types of racks differentiated by their back panel:

• the first AM170, reserved to RTE (France) features a single power supply connector,

• the second AM170D with two power supply connectors.

Both types of racks allow to install redundant power supply boards.

The connectors and external connecting points of the DIP teleprotection equipment are located on the rear panel of the equipment.

Optical fibre

access

D0058FRa

FIGURE 4 - AM170 CONNECTORS AT THE BACK

AUX

P16

P14

P15

P11

P10

P12

P13P19

P20

P18

Optical fibre

access

Tx

Rx

- BAT

+BAT

1

1

11

1

1

- BAT

+BAT

MAIN

D0492Frc

FIGURE 5 - AM170DCONNECTORS AT THE BACK

Page 90: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 16/38 e-terragridcom DIP

Certain connectors are integral with the motherboard and are detailed as follows:

• Terminal block P10 reserved to acquisition inputs 1 to 4.

• Terminal block P11 reserved to restitution contacts 1 to 4.

• Terminal block P12 reserved to acquisition inputs 5 to 8, or 1 to 4 when the FI002 optional board is installed.

• Terminal block P13 reserved to restitution contacts 5 to 8.

• Terminal block P14 for transmission copy auxiliary outputs and command restitutions 1 to 4.

• Terminal block P15 for transmission copy auxiliary outputs and command restitutions 5 to 8.

• Terminal block P16 for distribution of major and minor alarm loops.

• Terminal block P17 for power supply in the case of the AM170.

• Terminal block for main P17 MAIN & auxiliary P21 AUX power supply in the case of the AM170.

• Female connector 15 pins P18 for access to the communication line

• Female connector 9 pins P19 for the RS 232C link with the maintenance / operation interface PC or remote access.

• BNC P20 connector to connect an external clock by IRIG-B signal.

The following connectors are part of the optical interface and are accessible by the back (hole in the rack)

• FC/PC connectors on the IR182 board.

• ST connectors on the IR185 board (IEEE C37-94), and

• LC or double LC connectors on the IR187 board (SFP module).

FIGURE 5 SHOWS THE POSITION OF THE TX AND RX OPTICAL CONNECTORS FOR THE IR182 AND IR185 BOARDS ON THE AM170D RACK.

THE TX AND RX ARE REVERSED ON THE SFP MODULES OF THE IR187 BOARD

6.2 I /O wiring of terminal blocks

Commands transmitted and received through the protection relays are wired to the P10, P11, P12 and P13 terminals blocks.

All input and output connections of these terminal blocks are isolated.

6.2.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks

The terminal blocks are fitted with a locating device to prevent any misconnection.

The I/O wires, with a cross-section of 0.08 to 2.5 mm², are connected to these terminal blocks through 10 self-locking connecting devices.

Page 91: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/38

D0055XXa

12

34

56

78

910

FIGURE 6 – 10 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR

The wiring of these terminal blocks must be performed as follows:

⇒ Strip each wire to a length of 9 mm,

⇒ Using the tool supplied (lever)) (see Figure 7 – Plug-in terminal block tool), press on 1,

⇒ Insert the wire in the dedicated housing,

⇒ Release the lever.

This type of terminal block offers the benefit of providing constant pressure to hold the cables while avoiding any risk of damage upon installation (over tightening)

Lever

D0054FRa

FIGURE 7 – PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCK TOOL

6.2.2 I/O pin-out of terminal blocks

The following table indicates the I/O pin-out on the P10, P11, P12 and P13 terminal blocks.

In this table, the following symbols are used to mark the pins:

IN A command is activated by applying voltage to these terminals. + designates the point to be connected to the positive terminal of the application – designates the point to be connected to the negative terminal of the application

OUT T and C respectively designate the MAKE and COMMON points of the available contacts.

Page 92: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 18/38 e-terragridcom DIP

ACCESS POINT

P10 TERMINAL BLOCK

P11 TERMINAL BLOCK

P12 TERMINAL BLOCK

P13 TERMINAL BLOCK

1 O ⇒ External loop External loop External loop External loop

2 O ⇒ Terminal present Terminal present Terminal present Terminal present

3 O ⇒ – IN1

C OUT1

– IN5

C OUT5

4 O ⇒ + T + T

5 O ⇒ – IN2

C OUT2

– IN6

C OUT6

6 O ⇒ + T + T

7 O ⇒ – IN3

C OUT3

– IN7

C OUT7

8 O ⇒ + T + T

9 O ⇒ – IN4 C OUT4 – IN8 C OUT8

10 O ⇒ + T + T

TABLE 4 – LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS ON THE P10, P11, P12 AND P13 TERMINAL BLOCKS

The pins 1 and 2 of the P10, P11, P12 and P13 connectors (see figure 6 – 10 pin wago connector) must be connected together. This bridging allows checking the presence of the terminal block. If removed, the connection is no longer detected, and an alarm generated.

RECOMMENDATION

ALL EXTERNAL RELAYS CONNECTED TO THE OUTPUT CONTACTS OF THE TELEPROTECTION MUST BE FITTED WITH A FREE- WHEELING DIODE.

6.2.3 Allocation of logical input commands

Depending on the DIP hardware configuration, a combinatorial logic operator can be applied to inputs and then allocated to commands sent to another DIP.

Input logic allows a logical operator to be affected to board input and to be allocated to a command.

Permitted combinations are:

OR: OR logic between 2 inputs

AND: AND logic between 2 inputs

LOG: logical function (digital mode) as follows

This feature is accessible when the number of inputs available exceeds the number of commands, as follows:

⇒ Version with 2 commands with one I/O board

⇒ Version with 4 commands with two I/O boards

Also, in these variants, the command output is activated on two independent relays.

The allocation of input and output commands is given by table 5 below) using the human machine interface (see the HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE chapter § Configuring I/O parameters).

Page 93: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/38

TERMINAL

BLOCK COMMAND ALLOCATION VERSION 2 COMMANDS 1

I/O BOARD VERSION 4 COMMANDS 1

I/O BOARD VERSION 4 COMMANDS 2

I/O BOARDS VERSION 8 COMMANDS

(1)

2 I/O BOARDS DIGITAL

ONLY

P10

Acquisition COMMAND 1

IN1 IN1

IN1 IN1

IN2 IN2

IN1 or IN2 IN1 or IN2

IN1 and IN2 IN1 and IN2

LOG (IN1, IN2) (2) LOG (IN1, IN2) (2)

Acquisition COMMAND 2

IN3 IN2

IN3 IN2

IN4 IN4

IN3 or IN4 IN3 or IN4

IN3 and IN4 IN3 and IN4

LOG (IN3, IN4) (2) LOG (IN3, IN4) (2)

Acquisition

COMMAND 3

IN3

IN5 IN3

IN6

IN5 or IN6

IN5 and IN6

LOG (IN5, IN6) (2)

Acquisition

COMMAND 4

IN4

IN7 IN4

IN8

IN7 or IN8

IN7 and IN8

LOG (IN7, IN8) (2)

P12

Acquisition

COMMAND 5

IN5

Acquisition

COMMAND 6

IN6

Acquisition

COMMAND 7

IN7

Acquisition

COMMAND 8

IN8

P11

Restitution COMMAND 1

OUT1 / OUT2 OUT1 OUT1 / OUT2 OUT1

Restitution COMMAND 2

OUT3 / OUT4 OUT2 OUT3 / OUT4 OUT2

Restitution COMMAND 3

OUT3 OUT5 / OUT6 OUT3

Restitution COMMAND 4

OUT4 OUT7 / OUT8 OUT4

P13

Restitution COMMAND 5

OUT5

Restitution COMMAND 6

OUT6

Restitution COMMAND 7

OUT7

Restitution COMMAND 8

OUT8

TABLE 5 – COMMAND ALLOCATION

(1) Standard I/O, without combination

(2) Only in digital mode

Page 94: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 20/38 e-terragridcom DIP

6.2.4 Examples of wiring

For wiring Examples in different contexts (2, 4, 8 commands, one or two I/O boards) see figure 17 – rj45 portFigure 18 - AM170 - CONNECtors at the backFigure 19 - AM170D – CONNECTOR AT THE BACK and figure 20 – AM170 kit.

6.3 Wiring alarms and copy contacts

The command output copies are wired on terminal blocks P14, P15 and the alarm contacts output on terminal block P16 at the rear side of the unit. The connector reference and Pin 1 position are labelled on the rear panel (see Appendix -figure 17 – rj45 port).

The copy outputs are distributed into 4 groups, all isolated from one another. Each group is composed of 4 normally-open contacts and one common contact.

The alarm outputs are distributed as 4 normally-closed contacts all isolated from each other, 2 contacts for major alarms and 2 contacts for minor alarms.

6.3.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks

The conductors, with a cross-section of 0.08 to 2.5 mm², are connected to these terminal blocks through 11 self-locking connecting devices.

D0056XXa

12

34

56

78

910

11

FIGURE 8 – 11 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR

Page 95: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/38

6.3.2 Pin-out of the copy and alarm outputs on the terminal blocks

The following table specifies the PIN-OUT of the command copy outputs and alarm contact outputs on the P14, P5 and P16 terminal blocks.

For the alarm terminal block, refer also to the following chapter when using an AL142 or AL143 board.

The following abbreviations were used to name the pins:

COPY Ti for the i contact of copy output normally-open.

COPY C for the auxiliary output common contact

R, T, C designates the normally-closed, normally-open and common contacts available, respectively.

PIN TERMINAL BLOCK P14 TERMINAL BLOCK P15 TERMINAL BLOCK P16

1 T COPY T1 T COPY T9 C

Minor alarm output 1

2 T COPY T2 T COPY T10 R

3 T COPY T3 T COPY T11 not used

4 T COPY T4 T COPY T12 C

Minor alarm output 2

5* C COPY C 1 to 4 C COPY C 9 to 12 R

6 not used not used not used

7 T COPY T5 T COPY T13 C

Major alarm output 1

8 T COPY T6 T COPY T14 R

9 T COPY T7 T COPY T15 not used

10 T COPY T8 T COPY T16 C

Major alarm output 2

11** C COPY C 5 to 8 C COPY C 13 to 16 R

TABLE 6 – LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS OF TERMINAL BLOCKS P14, P15 AND P16

* Pin 5 is common to contacts 1 to 4 of terminal blocks 14 & 15.

** Pin 11 is common to contacts 7 to 10 of terminal blocks 14 & 15.

Page 96: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 22/38 e-terragridcom DIP

6.3.3 Particular case of the AL142 and AL143 boards.

When these optional boards are used, the alarm contacts are normally open. The output points on P16 are identical but the allocation is changed.

PIN TERMINAL BLOCK P16

1 C Minor alarm output 1

2 T

3 not used

4 C Minor alarm output 2

5 T

6 not used

7 C Major alarm output 1

8 T

9 not used

10 C Major alarm output 2

11 T

TABLE 7 – PINOUT OF ALARM TERMINAL BLOCKS P16

6.3.4 Allocation of copy outputs

Copy output relays are used to transmit information on the current status of transmission and reception, as follows:

Tx State for command number n: the contact(s) is(are) closed while the command n is being transmitted, open when in guard state or while other commands are transmitted.

Rx state for command number n: the contact(s) is(are) closed while the command n is being received, open when in guard state or while other commands are being received.

Page 97: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/38

The allocation of the copy output relays depends on the configuration (see table below).

COMMAND ALLOCATION 2 COMMANDS VERSION

1 I/O BOARD

4 COMMANDS VERSION

1 I/O BOARD

4 COMMANDS VERSION

2 I/O BOARDS

VERSION 8 COMMANDS)

2 I/O BOARDS (DIGITAL

ONLY)

COMMAND 1 Acquisition COPY

P14

P14

COPYT1

P14

COPYT1

COPYT2

COMMAND 1 Acquisition

COPY

P14

P14

COPYT5

COMMAND 2

Acquisition COP

Y

COPYT1

COPYT5 COPYT1 COPYT1 COPYT5 COPYT1

COPYT5 P14

P14

COMMAND 2 Acquisition COPY

COPYT6 COPYT2 COPYT2

P15

COPYT6 COPYT2

COMMAND 3 Acquisition COPY

COPYT3 COPYT9

COPYT13 COPYT3

COMMAND 4 Acquisition COPY

COPYT4

COPYT10

COMMAND 4 Acquisition

COPY

COMMAND 5

Acquisition COP

Y

COMMAND 6

Acquisition COP

Y

COPYT14 COPYT4 COPYT14 COPYT4

COMMAND 5 Acquisition COPY

P15

COPYT9

COMMAND 6 Acquisition COPY

COPYT10

COMMAND 7 Acquisition COPY

COPYT3

COPYT11

COMMAND 8 Acquisition COPY

COPYT12

COMMAND 1 Output COPY

P14 COPYT3

COPYT7 P14 COPYT5 P14

TABLE 8 – ALLOCATION OF COPY OUTPUT

6.3.5 Recommendation

All relays connected to the output contacts must be fitted with a free-wheeling diode.

Page 98: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 24/38 e-terragridcom DIP

6.4 Power supply wiring

According to the type of rack, there are one or 2 power supply terminal blocks. In the case of a rack with 2 power supply terminal blocks, these are marked ‘main’ for the main power supply and ‘aux’ for the auxiliary power supply respectively, on the rear face (see Appendix figure 20 – AM170 kit).

The functional ground is mostly useful to protect the user during the laboratory test. In normal use, the grounding braid supplied with the equipment must be connected to one of the two M5 studs located at the back of the DIP unit.

According to the installations, it may be better to connect the +BAT or -BAT to this functional ground, or leave these polarities floating.

6.4.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks

The cables, with a cross-section of 0.08 to 2.5 mm², are connected to the terminal block through a WAGO self-locking connector.

6.4.2 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170 rack

PIN MARKING POLARITY

1 -BAT Power supply negative polarity

2 -BAT

3 +BAT Power supply positive polarity

4 +BAT

5 Non connected

6

Functional ground

7

TABLE 9 – PINOUT OF THE P17 TERMINAL BLOCK

6.4.3 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170D rack

Two power supply connectors are available on the rear panel (see figure 5).

P21 main connector, P17 secondary connector in case of redundant power supply.

These two connectors offer the same pinout:

PIN MARKING POLARITY

1 -BAT Power supply negative polarity

2 +BAT Power supply positive polarity

3 Non connected

4

Functional ground

TABLE 10 – PINOUT OF THE MAIN & AUXILIARY TERMINAL BLOCK

These two connectors are independent, and can hence be supplied by two different sources.

Note: When a single source is available but two power supply boards are to be installed, the two connectors must be linked, as shown in the following figure.

Page 99: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/38

AUX

- BAT

+BAT

- BAT

+BAT

MAIN

D0065 FRa

P17 P21

Battery

FIGURE 9 - AM170D WIRING OF TWO POWER SUPPLIES FOR A SINGLE SOURCE

6.5 Access port for line connection support

This chapter concerns all versions of the DIP equipment, except the variant using optical fiber. In this case, refer to chapter 6.6 on connections by optical fiber.

6.5.1 Description of the connectors

The line connection interface (connector P18) is on the mother board of the equipment (See Appendix - Figure 18 - AM170 - CONNECtors at the back

The connection must be implemented using the male SUB-D 15 pin connector supplied with the equipment, It is locked by screws (supplied). A cover holding the cable for a straight outlet is also part of standard equipment.

Non-allocated terminals must not be connected, in compliance with isolation restrictions.

The definition of the multi-strand conductor to be used is the following:

To be welded: AWG 20 to 22 (0.324 to 0.519 mm²).

Acceptable cable diameter: 8.2 mm maximum.

Cable-clamp reducers for maximum diameters of 4.1mm, 5.5mm and 6.8mm are supplied.

Cable shielding must be connected to the metallic cover.

For digital teleprotection links, immunity to electromagnetic disturbance is linked directly to proper connection of the cable shield to the functional ground on both sides of the link.

Page 100: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 26/38 e-terragridcom DIP

6.5.2 Pin-out of the V11 / X24 - IR179 interface

V11/X24 interface

(ISO 1903)

S’: clock transmitter circuit

for non-standard use

D0607FRa

FIGURE 10 – PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE

Pin Name direction Signal designation Pin Name Signal designation

1 nc

2 T(A) output Transmission (A) 9 T(B) Transmission (B)

3 nc 10

4 R(A) input Reception (A) 11 R(B) Reception (B)

5 nc 12

6 S(A) input Signal synchronization (A)

13 S(B) Signal synchronization (B)

7 S'(A) output DCE mode Synchronization (A)

14 S'(B) DCE mode synchronization (B)

8 nc 15

TABLE 11 – PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE

The S signal is a non standard feature. In fact, the DIP must be considered as being a DTE. The S synchronization clock signal is supplied in order to provide a direct link between two DIP units to perform tests. The use of the S’ signal is controlled by the HMI.

Page 101: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/38

6.5.3 Pinout of the G703-1 (64 kbps) - IR180 codirectional interface

Codirectional interfaceG703.1

D0608 FRa

FIGURE 11 – PINOUT OF THE G703.1 INTERFACE

Pin Name direction Signal designation Pin Name

Signal designation

1 nc

2 T(A) output Transmission (A) 9 T(B) Transmission (B)

3 nc 10

4 R(A) input Reception (A) 11 R(B) Reception (B)

5 nc 12

6 nc 13

7 nc 14

8 nc 15

TABLE 12 – CONNECTION OF THE G703-1 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE

Page 102: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 28/38 e-terragridcom DIP

6.5.4 Pinout of the G703-6 (2 Mbps) - IR173 interface

The IR173, G703-6, 120 ohm interface board has been derived into 2 models:

• IR173_120 (Index B), 2 Mbps / 120 ohms interface

• IR173_75 (Index A), 2 Mbps / 75 ohms interface

D0609Frb

FIGURE 12 – PINOUT OF THE G703.6 2 MBIT/S IR173 INTERFACE

Pin Name direction Signal designation Pin Name

Signal designation

1 nc

2 nc 9

3 Tx + output Transmission (A) 10 Tx - Transmission (B)

4 nc 11

5 Rx + input Reception (A) 12 Rx - Reception (B)

6 nc 13

7 nc 14

8 nc 15

TABLE 13 – CONNECTION OF THE G703-6 IR 173 INTERFACE

FIGURE 13 – PINOUT OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE

Page 103: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/38

Pin Name direction Signal designation Pin Name

Signal designation

1 nc

2 Tx +

nc

output Transmission (A)

9

10 Tx - Transmission (B)

3

4 Rx +

nc

input Reception (A)

11

12 Rx - Reception (B)

5

6 nc 13

7 nc 14

8 nc 15

TABLE 14 – CONNECTION OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE

6.5.5 Voice frequency (analog mode) - IR183 interface

Analog interface

D0610FRa

FIGURE 14 – PINOUT OF THE ANALOG INTERFACE

Pin Name directionPin Name Designation and description of the circuits

1

2 Tx(A) output 9 Tx(B) Voice frequency output signal (transmission)

3 TBB(A) output 10 TBB(B) Tx Blocking / Boost command circuit (solid-state relay)

4 Rx(A) input 11 Rx(B) Voice frequency signal in (receive)

5 RB(A) output 12 RB(B) Rx Blocking command circuit (solid-state relay)

6 EA(+) input 13 EA(-) External Alarm input (opto-isolated)

7 AL(A) output 14 AL(B) Live output circuit (solid-state relay)

8 nc 15

TABLE 15 – CONNECTION OF THE VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE

Page 104: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 30/38 e-terragridcom DIP

6.6 Optical fiber access port

In case of configuration by optical fiber, the optical interface board, installed in the reserved location of the rack, must be blocked with its two fastening screws.

Three versions of optical boards are managed: IR182, IR185 and IR187.

The connectors of the optical interface, accessible at the back (see figure 20 – AM170 kit), are part of the optical board:

• 2 FC / PC connectors for IR182.

• ST connectors for IR185.

• LC connector for IR187.

The types of fibers recommended are:

• Single mode fiber 9/125 µm for 1310 and 1550 nm applications

• Multimode fiber 62.5/125 µm for 850 nm applications.

EMC protection

When not used, the rack connector must be covered with an EMC protection plate.

REMOVING THE OPTICAL BOARD

DO NOT REMOVE THE OPTICAL BOARDS WITHOUT HAVING REMOVED THE TWO SCREWS FASTENING THE REAR PANEL.

6.7 Standard HMI access port (PC connection)

The DIP is equipped with two RS 232 serial ports, one located on the front panel, the second on the back of the unit (see Appendix-Figure 16 – Description of the HMI CONNECtor at the back).

The download / display port fitted on the front panel is an ultra low voltage circuit (ULV) ensuring basic isolation against electric shock. When powering on the relay, the terminals of this port must not be touched to prevent any risk of electric shock in case of fault. This port is designed to be used for maintenance, i.e. monitoring and downloading software, it must not be connected permanently.

The connectors are female SUB-D 9-pin connectors.

These ports allow to connect the PC to the unit by means of an RS 232C cable. When two cables are connected, the one on the front face has the priority.

FIGURE 15 – DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE FRONT

When using the RS 232C main connector at the back, an adapter of the DTE-DCE type must be connected. This port supports the RTS / CTS hardware protocol and the remote connection.

Page 105: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/38

D0619FRa

FIGURE 16 – DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR AT THE BACK

CAP

When not used, fit the cap supplied onto the connectors.

6.8 Optional RJ45 HMI access port

If the ME50 option is chosen, the RS232 front serial port is replaced by a standard RJ45 network port.

1 8

D0620FRa

FIGURE 17 – RJ45 PORT

6.9 IRIG-B interface port

If an optional IRIG_B interface board is installed, this port is used to connect with an external clock supporting an IRIG-B synchronization interface (IRIG-B mode with 1 kHz analog modulation).

The connector, located on the unit’s rear, is a standard female BNC connector (see P20 in Appendix - Figure 19 - AM170D – CONNECTOR AT THE BACK). It is accessible with a male connector of a standard BNC coaxial cable.

Cap

When not used, the connector must be covered with the BNC cap supplied with the equipment.

Page 106: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 32/38 e-terragridcom DIP

6.10 FI002 wiring

An FI002 board may be installed to guarantee advanced protection against capacitive discharge at the input.

The command input must be connected to the P13 connector. The P10 and P12 connectors must be interconnected (see the figure au-dessoushere below).

P10

P12

P13

P11

1 10

Cmd 1

Cmd 2

Cmd 3

Cmd 4

+ + + +

Command Outputs access

FI002 filter wiring

Command inputs

D0489ENa

FIGURE 26 – WIRING OF THE COMMAND AND FILTER INPUTS

Page 107: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/38

7. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

The equipment’s installation includes the following phases:

1. Install casing (rack, cabinet, or box).

2. Insert cables for subsystems and operation (power supply, earthing, transmission medium, and protection equipment).

3. Mount rack in casing. Fasten in place using the screws on the front panel.

4. Connect rack to earth circuit.

5. Before installing the cards in the racks, make sure apparatus is switched off (plugs removed or switch open).

6. Install cards in rack.

NOTE: The optical interface card must be mounted and tied to the rack before mounting the rack in the frame.

Page 108: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 34/38 e-terragridcom DIP

8. APPENDIX

8.1 AM170 - Location of the terminal blocks

Optical fibre

access

D 0058 FRa

FIGURE 18 - AM170 - CONNECTORS AT THE BACK

Command input and output terminal blocks

P10 Acquisition of commands 1 to 4

Connecting terminal blocks to the protection and command management systems (§ 6.2 and § 6.3)

P11 Restitution of commands 1 to 4

P12 Acquisition of commands 5 to 8

P13 Restitution of commands 5 to 8

P14 Command copy contacts 1 to 4

P15 Command copy contacts 5 to 8

TABLE 16 – COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS

Auxiliary terminal blocks

P16 Terminal blocks for connection to alarm management systems (§ 6.3)

P17 Power supply connection terminal blocks (§ 6.4)

P18 Line connection port (§ 6.5)

P19 Remote access (§ 6.7)

P20 External time synchronization connection port (§ 6.8)

TABLE 17 – OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE

Page 109: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/38

8.2 AM170D - Location of the terminal blocks – Double power supply version

AUX

P16

P14

P15

P11

P10

P12

P13P19

P20

P18

Optical fibre

access

Tx

Rx

- BAT

+ BAT

1

1

1 1

1

1

- BAT

+ BAT

MAIN

D0492 Frc

FIGURE 19 - AM170D – CONNECTOR AT THE BACK

The figure above shows the position of the Tx and Rx optical connectors for the IR182 and IR185 boards.

These outputs are reversed on SFP modules of the IR187 board.

Command input and output terminal blocks

P10 Acquisition of commands 1 to 4

Connecting terminal blocks to the protection and command management systems (§ 6.2 and § 6.3)

P11 Restitution of commands 1 to 4

P12 Acquisition of commands 5 to 8

P13 Restitution of commands 5 to 8

P14 Auxiliary outputs of commands 1 to 4

P15 Auxiliary outputs of commands 5 to 8

TABLE 18 – COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS

Auxiliary terminal blocks

P16 Terminal blocks for connection to alarm management systems (§ 6.3)

MAIN Main power supply connection terminal blocks (§ 6.4)

AUX Secondary power supply connection terminal blocks

P18 Line connection ports (§ 6.5)

P19 Remote access (§ 6.7)

P20 External time synchronization connection port (§ 6.8)

TABLE 19 – OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE

Page 110: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 36/38 e-terragridcom DIP

8.3 Connector kits delivered with the equipment

FIGURE 20 – AM170 KIT

FIGURE 21 – AM170D KIT

The SUB-D 15 pin connector can change according to the supplier.

Page 111: DIP User Manual

Installation

DIP/EN IN/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/38

8.4 Connection of the 2-command version

Copy Command acquisition 1

Copy Command acquisition 2

Copy Command restitution 1

Copy Command restitution 2Command restitution 1 Command restitution 2

Command acquisition 1 Command acquisition 2

Group 1 Group 2

Common copy group 1

Common copy group 2

S S S S

EN EN EN EN

D 0059 FRa

FIGURE 22 – CONNECTIONS OF THE TWO-COMMAND VERSION

8.5 Connections of the 4-command version with 1 I/O board

D0060FRa

P10

E1 E2 E3 E4

- + - - -+ + +

P11P14

S1 S2 S3 S4

Copie Acquisition Ordre 1

Copie Acquisition Ordre 2

Copie Acquisition Ordre 3

Copie Acquisition Ordre 4

Copie Restitution Ordre 1

Copie Restitution Ordre 2

Copie Restitution Ordre 3

Copie Restitution Ordre 4

Acquisition

Ordre 1

Acquisition

Ordre 3

Acquisition

Ordre 4

Acquisition

Ordre 2

Restitution

Ordre 1

Restitution

Ordre 3

Restitution

Ordre 4

Restitution

Ordre 2

Commun Copies

Acquisition d'ordres

Commun Copies

Restitution d'ordres

FIGURE 23 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 1 I/O BOARD

Page 112: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN IN/A23

Installation

Page 38/38 e-terragridcom DIP

8.6 Connections of the 4-command version with 2 I/O boards

Copy Command acquisition 1

Copy Command acquisition 2

Copy Command restitution 1

Copy Command restitution 4

Copy Command restitution 3

Copy Command acquisition 4

Copy Command acquisition 3

Copy Command restitution 2

Group 1

Group 3

Group 2

Group 4

Common group 1Common group 2Common group 3Common group 4

Command restitution 1

S1 S2 S3 S4

S5 S6 S7 S8

EN1 EN2 EN3 EN4

EN5 EN6 EN7 EN8

Command restitution 2

Command acquisition 1 Command acquisition 2

Command acquisition 3 Command acquisition 4

Command restitution 3 Command restitution 4

D 0061 FRa

FIGURE 24 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 2 I/O BOARDS

8.7 Connection of the 8-command version

Copy Command acquisition 1

Command

acquisition 1

Command

acquisition 2

Command

acquisition 3

Command

acquisition 4

Command

acquisition 5

Command

acquisition 6

Command

acquisition 7

Command

acquisition 8

Copy Command acquisition 2Copy Command acquisition 3Copy Command acquisition 4

Copy Command acquisition 8Copy Command acquisition 7Copy Command acquisition 6Copy Command acquisition 5

Copy Command restitution 1Copy Command restitution 2Copy Command restitution 3Copy Command restitution 4

Copy Command restitution 8Copy Command restitution 7Copy Command restitution 6Copy Command restitution 5

Common group 1Common group 2Common group 4Common group 3

Group 1 Group 2

Group 3 Group 4

Command

restitution 1

Command

restitution 2

Command

restitution 3

Command

restitution 4

Command

restitution 5

Command

restitution 6

Command

restitution 7

Command

restitution 8

S1 S2 S3 S4

S5 S6 S7 S8

EN1 EN2 EN3 EN4

EN5 EN6 EN7 EN8

D0062 FRa

FIGURE 25 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 8-COMMAND VERSION

Page 113: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23 e-terragridcom DIP

COMMISSIONING

Page 114: DIP User Manual
Page 115: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/44

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7

2. FOREWORD 8

2.1 Step by step procedure 8

2.1.1 Reminder on the final status of the installation procedure 8

3. PRIOR CONDITIONS CHECK 9

4. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 10

4.1 Initial status 10

4.2 Configuration of the I/O board jumpers 10

4.2.1 I/O board type SR11x 10

4.2.2 I/O board type SR200 10

4.2.3 Option FI005 on SR200 board 12

4.3 Configuration of the IR187 optical communication interface 12

4.3.1 IR182 mode 13

4.3.2 C37.94 Mode 13

4.4 Configuration of the IR185 optical communication interface 14

4.5 Final status 14

5. POWER ON 15

5.1 Initial status of the power on 15

5.2 Prior conditions 15

5.3 Power on procedure 15

5.4 Final status of the power on 15

6. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION 16

6.1 Introduction 16

6.2 Prior conditions 16

6.3 Initial status 16

6.4 Configuration of the DIP digital version 16

6.4.1 Creating a user password 16

6.4.2 Creating a software password 17

6.4.3 Configuring General Parameters 17

6.4.4 Configuring the communication interface 17

6.4.5 Configuring the redundancy interface 17

6.4.6 Configuring Input/output Parameters 19

6.4.7 Configuring application parameters 20

6.4.8 Configuring alarm parameters 21

6.4.9 Entering comments 22

6.4.10 Saving the configuration 22

Page 116: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 2/44 e-terragridcom DIP

6.5 Configuring DIP Single tone analog version 23

6.5.1 Creating a user password 23

6.5.2 Configuring General Parameters 23

6.5.3 Configuring Sender Parameters 24

6.5.4 Configuring Receiver Parameters 25

6.5.5 Configuring I/O parameters 26

6.5.6 Alarms parameters – Single tone 26

6.5.7 Saving the configuration 27

6.6 Configuring DIP Analogue Dual Tone 27

6.6.1 Creating a password 27

6.6.2 Configuring general parameters - Dual tone analog version 27

6.6.3 Configuring sender parameters - Dual tone version 28

6.6.4 Configuring receiver parameters - Dual tone version 29

6.6.5 Configuring I/O parameters - Dual tone version 30

6.6.6 Configuring alarms parameters - Dual tone version 31

6.6.7 Saving the configuration 31

6.7 Final status of the configuration step 31

7. TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION 32

7.1 Initial status 32

7.2 Checking procedure 32

7.3 Final status 33

8. OPERATING CHECKS 34

8.1 Initial status 34

8.2 Procedure 34

8.3 Self-checks 35

8.3.1 Alarms forcing 35

8.3.2 Maintenance forcing commands 35

8.3.3 Forcing PLC commands 35

8.4 Online checks 35

8.5 Final status 35

9. APPENDIX A 36

9.1 Implantation diagram of the UT148 / UT148D board 36

9.2 Implantation diagram of the SR11x board and jumper settings 37

9.3 Implantation diagram of the SR200 board and jumper settings 38

9.4 Implantation diagram of the AL137 and AL140 board 40

9.5 Implantation diagram of the AL139 board 40

9.6 Implantation diagram of the IR183 board 41

9.7 Implantation diagram of the FI002 board and jumper settings 42

9.8 Implantation diagram of the IR185 board and jumper settings 43

9.9 Implantation diagram of the IR187 board and jumper settings 44

Page 117: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/44

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 – COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE 8

FIGURE 2 – JUMPERS OF THE SR11X BOARDS 10

FIGURE 3 – JUMPERS OF THE SR200 11

FIGURE 4 – IR187 MODE IR182 13

FIGURE 5 – IR187 MODE C37.94 13

FIGURE 6 – POWER ON PROCEDURE 15

FIGURE 7 – FINAL CHECKS AND CONFIGURATION 34

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 1 – CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR11X BOARDS 10

TABLE 2 – ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR11X 10

TABLE 3 – CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR200 BOARDS 11

TABLE 4 – ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR200 11

TABLE 5 –PARTICULAR CASE SR200 WITH FI005 12

TABLE 6 – SETTINGS OF THE ROTATING SWITCH 14

TABLE 7 – GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 17

TABLE 8 – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET 17

TABLE 9 – REDUNDANCY INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET 18

TABLE 10 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 19

TABLE 11 – APPLICATION PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 21

TABLE 12 – ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 22

TABLE 13 – COMMENTS PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 22

TABLE 14 – GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 23

TABLE 15 – SENDER PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 24

TABLE 16 – RECEIVER PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 25

TABLE 17 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 26

TABLE 18 – ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 27

TABLE 19 – GENERAL PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE 28

TABLE 20 – SENDER PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE 29

TABLE 21 – RECEIVER PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE ANALOG 30

Page 118: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 4/44 e-terragridcom DIP

TABLE 22 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – DUAL TONE 30

TABLE 23 – ALARMS PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE 31

Page 119: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/44

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS

A 28/12/2000 Original issue

B 23/04/2001 Added the optical interface

C 23/08/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version

D 14/11/2007 New features, task oriented writing

E 29/02/2008 Minor correction

A22 20/04/2009 Version 2.2

A23 13/01/2011 Minor corrections, added I/O SR200 interface, IR187 optical interface

B23 28/03/2011 Former State on digital version added

Page 120: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 6/44 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 121: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/44

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP/EN SS/A23 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.

(1) As per the option chosen

Page 122: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 8/44 e-terragridcom DIP

2. FOREWORD

Commissioning the DIP applies the step by step procedure described in the following paragraphs.

Applying this procedure prevents any risk of malfunction or damage of the equipment.

This procedure also guarantees an optimum configuration of the link and better levels of performance in a minimum time, in compliance with safety rules.

The commissioning procedures and checks require from the user an acquaintance with the use of the HMI software (refer to the chapter Human-Machine Interface for more information).

Only a PC supporting the HMI software can be used for commissioning, no other measurement device or multimeter is required.

2.1 Step by step procedure

2.1.1 Reminder on the final status of the installation procedure

The first step in the commissioning procedure is the final status of the installation procedure:

• The DIP unit is grounded with the grounding braid supplied with the equipment.

• The boards are installed.

• The power supply cables and those of the transmission medium are connected.

Steps in commissioning a DIP unit:

Prior conditions check

Hardware configuration

Power on

Software configuration

Tests and troubleshooting

Operating checks

End

Start

D0611FRa

FIGURE 1 – COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

Page 123: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/44

3. PRIOR CONDITIONS CHECK

Before commissioning, the following points MUST be checked:

• Installation complete.

• The DIP unit is grounded (refer to § Connection in the Installation chapter).

• The value of the direct power supply on the level of the DIP input.

• Connection with the power supply terminal block (refer to § Wiring the supply in the Installation chapter).

• Power supply board compliant with the direct input voltage available (refer to § Ranges of Vdc values of the power supply boards in the Installation chapter).

• If applicable, polarity of the command inputs at connectors P10 and P12.

• Pins 1 and 2 on the terminal blocks P10, P11, P12 and P13 must be connected with a jumper (refer to § I/O wiring of the terminal blocks in the Installation chapter), otherwise an alarm is present.

• Pre-requisite: only a trained and authorized technician may perform the installation, programming, commissioning, maintenance, test and repair operations.

• Caution:

Signs: precautions and indications on hazardous voltages and power levels must be observed.

Page 124: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 10/44 e-terragridcom DIP

4. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

4.1 Initial status

Prior conditions have been checked.

The positions of the links must not be modified, unless the input voltage has been isolated.

4.2 Configuration of the I/O board jumpers

This step requires an intervention on the boards. Safety reminder:

ESD protection: the modules of this equipment contain devices likely to be damaged by static discharge. Appropriate measures are to be applied before unpacking the modules or removing them from the equipment racks. Essential precautions avoiding damage due to static discharge during any intervention on the modules: grounding braids for technical staff and supply of antistatic workshops. The modules can be shipped only in their original packing or be installed in the equipment racks.

4.2.1 I/O board type SR11x

SR11x boards are fitted with the S2 S3 S4 S5 jumpers.

D0127XXa

123

S 2

123

S 3

123

S 4

123

S 5

FIGURE 2 – JUMPERS OF THE SR11X BOARDS

The jumpers on the SR11x I/O boards must be configured according to the value of the command acquisition voltage.

• The following table indicates the correspondence between command inputs and the location of the SR 11x board in the rack in an installation with two boards.

S2 S3 S4 S5

SR11x In high position

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4

SR11x In medium position

Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

TABLE 1 – CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR11X BOARDS

• The following table indicates, per type of SR11x board, the value of direct voltage accepted at command input according to the position of each jumper.

Position SR114 SR114D SR115 SR116

1 - 2 220 V –250 Vdc 220 V –250 Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc 110 V -127 Vdc

2 - 3 48 V -127 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc 24 Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc

TABLE 2 – ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR11X

4.2.2 I/O board type SR200

The SR200 board is fitted with several configurable jumpers.

Page 125: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/44

4.2.2.1 Acquisition of a command

The JP1, JP3, JP5 and JP7 jumpers must be configured according to the value of the command acquisition voltage.

FIGURE 3 – JUMPERS OF THE SR200

• The following table indicates the correspondence between command inputs and the location of the SR 200 I/O board in the rack in an installation with two boards.

JP1 JP3 JP5 JP7

SR200 In high position in the rack

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4

SR200 In medium position in the rack

Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

TABLE 3 – CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR200 BOARDS

• The following table indicates the value of direct voltage accepted at command input according to the position of each jumper.

Position SR200 Minimum Maximum

1 - 2 24Vdc 18 Vdc 30 Vdc

3 - 4 48 V -60 Vdc 36 Vdc 75 Vdc

5 - 6 110-127Vdc 83 Vdc 158 Vdc

7 - 8 220-250 Vdc 165 Vdc 312 Vdc

TABLE 4 – ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR200

Page 126: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 12/44 e-terragridcom DIP

4.2.2.2 Output contacts

All output contacts both for commands and command copy are implemented by a static relay and a mechanical relay in parallel.

The JP9 to JP32 jumpers allow to commission the static relay or not, to the detriment of transfer time.

Position 1 – 2 Position 2 – 3 Command

JP9 – JP10 Command output

on mechanical relay and static relay in parallel

Command output on mechanical

relay only

1 or 5

JP11 – JP12 2 or 6

JP13 – JP14 3 or 7

JP15 – JP16 4 or 8

JP17 – JP18

Command copy output on

mechanical relay and static relay in

parallel

Command copy output on

mechanical relay only

The allocation of the copy outputs is detailed in the INSTALLATION

part

JP19 – JP20

JP21 – JP22

JP23 – JP24

JP25 – JP26

JP27 – JP28

JP29 – JP30

JP31 – JP32

4.2.3 Option FI005 on SR200 board

When the SR200 board is fitted with the FI005 module to send commands by dry loop instead of voltage, the JP1, JP3, JP5 and JP7 jumpers must be set to position 1-2.

Position SR200 Minimum Maximum

1 - 2 24Vdc 18 Vdc 30 Vdc

TABLE 5 –PARTICULAR CASE SR200 WITH FI005

4.3 Configuration of the IR187 optical communication interface

The IR187 board can be configured in two different modes:

• IR182 mode using the Manchester 2 protocol,

• IR185 mode using the protocol defined by the IEEE C37.94 recommendation.

Check that the SFP module is present and matches the application required.

Page 127: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/44

4.3.1 IR182 mode

This mode ensures compatibility with the IR182 single mode optical interface.

• Set JP1 to 1-2

• Set JP2 to 2-3

• Set the coding wheel to position 1

32

78

FIGURE 4 – IR187 MODE IR182

4.3.2 C37.94 Mode

This mode is recommended for intra-substation optical links.

• Set JP1 to 2-3

• Set JP2 to 1-2

• The coding wheel must be set to position 1 to 8, according to the flow chosen. If N is the value on the coding wheel, the actual rate is Nx64kbps. See table 6 which is also applicable here.

32

78

FIGURE 5 – IR187 MODE C37.94

Page 128: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 14/44 e-terragridcom DIP

4.4 Configuration of the IR185 optical communication interface

Safety reminder

Laser / LED: beware when using optical boards of class I Laser / LED products.

The IR185 optical communication interface has a rotating switch to be defined according to the frequency clocks of the DIP.

The following table allows selecting the position of the rotating switch.

Position of the rotating switch Actual rate DIP

0 Factory test

1 64 Kbps

2 128 Kbps

3 192 Kbps

4 256 Kbps

5 320 Kbps

6 384 Kbps

7 448 Kbps

8 512 Kbps

9 Not used

TABLE 6 – SETTINGS OF THE ROTATING SWITCH

4.5 Final status

The hardware configuration of the I/O boards is compatible with the CC value of the input signal command.

If applicable, the optical communication interface is configured and ready for use.

The DIP is ready to be powered on.

Page 129: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/44

5. POWER ON

5.1 Initial status of the power on

• Prior conditions have been checked.

• The hardware configuration is complete.

5.2 Prior conditions

This procedure requires knowing the location of the switch on the power supply boards and indication of the LED status.

• For more information on the location of the LEDs and the switch on the boards, refer to appendix A.

• For more information on the indication of the status of the LEDs, refer to § Maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.

5.3 Power on procedure

Powering on the DIP unit is performed as follows:

Start

Power on

(AL13x / AL14x boards)

Check the state of the LEDs:

Is the AL13x /

AL14x power supply LED green ?

Check the state of

the LEDs: Are the ‘state’

indicators on the UT148

board green ?

Repair

(See § Tests and

troubleshooting)

No

No

Yes

End

D0612FRa

Yes

FIGURE 6 – POWER ON PROCEDURE

When the DIP is powered on, check the status of the LEDs, which must be green.

• In the case of a LED corresponding to a fault, refer to § Tests and fault isolation in the Maintenance chapter.

5.4 Final status of the power on

At the end of this procedure, the DIP is powered on and ready to receive the configuration files.

Page 130: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 16/44 e-terragridcom DIP

6. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

6.1 Introduction

The software configurations of the digital DIP, single tone analog DIP and dual tone analog versions are described separately in the following paragraphs.

6.2 Prior conditions

The software configuration requires a PC running the HMI software, compatible with the firmware of the DIP. The operator must be acquainted with the use of the HMI software.

To create a new configuration, you must be connected with a DIP.

Upon commissioning, you must:

• Either create a new configuration,

• Or have a configuration already saved in the PC,

• Or log onto the DIP, read the configuration, modify it, and return it to the DIP if required.

6.3 Initial status

The DIP unit is powered on.

OPERATING THE HMI DIP: DURING OPERATION MAY DISTURB THE TELEPROTECTION LINK BY THE USE OF CERTAIN FEATURES PROPOSED BY THE DIP HMI WITHIN EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE (E.G. COMMAND FORCING).

6.4 Configuration of the DIP digital version

For more details on the configuration procedures of DIP DIGITAL, refer to the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter. Each step of the procedure corresponds to a paragraph in the HMI chapter.

The configuration procedure is as follows:

• Creating a user password

• Creating a software password

• Configuring General Parameters

• Configuring the backup interface (option)

• Configuring I/O parameters

• Configuring application parameters

• Configuring alarm parameters

• Entering comments

• Saving the configuration

6.4.1 Creating a user password

Access to the configuration parameters of the DIP is protected by password. The intervention level granted to a user depends on the password. First, create the passwords, then the associated levels.

To create a user password, refer to § DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP DIGITAL.

The password is saved in the PC.

ATTENTION

Page 131: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/44

6.4.2 Creating a software password

For more security, a software password may be created, which is then saved in the equipment.

To create a software password, refer to § DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP DIGITAL.

If the software password is lost, the CPU, UT148 board must be returned to the factory to be reset.

6.4.3 Configuring General Parameters

Refer to the § Configuring the general parameters in the Human Machine Interface - DIP Digital chapter for more details (description of the parameters and range of values).

Configure or enter the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

The greyed out lines correspond to the mandatory minimum configuration of the parameters.

Parameter / HMI § General configuration Parameter value

Com link Master Slave

Logical address ……………. 0 to 127

Number of commands 2 commands 4 commands

8 commands

HMI port speed

19200 bit / s 4800 bit / s

2400 bit / s 1200 bit / s

600 bit / s

IRIG-B Enabled Disabled

Limitation of the number of events and alarms

Yes (255) No (1785)

TABLE 7 – GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION

* To set the synchronization refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-F-013.

6.4.4 Configuring the communication interface

Parameter / HMI § Communication interface

Type Clock (*) Speed (kbps)

IR173 G703.6

Received

Internal (default)

2048

IR179 V11 / X24 Normal (default)

H1

H2

32 64

128 256

IR180 G703-1 codirectional

Received

Internal (default)

64

IR182 Optical fiber or IR187 mode IR182

Received

Internal (default)

256

IR185 IEEE C37.94 or IR187 mode C37.94

Received

Internal (default)

Adjustable by coding wheel

TABLE 8 – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET

* To set the clocks refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-009.

6.4.5 Configuring the redundancy interface

If the redundancy interface is installed, its parameters must be configured.

Page 132: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 18/44 e-terragridcom DIP

Refer to the § Configuring the redundancy interface in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter / HMI § Redundancy interface

Type Clock (*) Speed (kbps)

Redundancy interface

IR173 G703.6

Received

Internal (default)

2048

IR179 V11 / X24 Normal (default)

H1

H2

32 64

128 256

IR180 G703-1 codirectional

Received

Internal (default)

64

Delay before switching

5 to 100 mS

TABLE 9 – REDUNDANCY INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET

* To set the clocks refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-009.

Page 133: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/44

6.4.6 Configuring Input/output Parameters

Refer to the § Configuring the I/O parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter / HMI § I/O configuration

Parameter value (*)

Input/Output 1 board 2 boards

Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 1

........................ 1 to 100 ms

Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 2

........................ 1 to 100 ms

Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 3

........................ 1 to 100 ms

Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 4

........................ 1 to 100 ms

Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 5

........................ 1 to 100 ms

Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 6

........................ 1 to 100 ms

Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 7

........................ 1 to 100 ms

Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 8

........................ 1 to 100 ms

Reverse logic command** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Input Filter and logic/Reverse Logic Command 1

E1 E2 E1 or E2

E1 and E2 LOG (E1 and E2)

Input Filter and logic/Reverse Logic Command 2

E3 E4 E3 or E4

E3 and E4 LOG (E3 and E4)

Input Filter and logic/Reverse Logic Command 3

E5 E6 E5 or E6

E5 and E6 LOG (E5 and E6)

Input Filter and logic/Reverse Logic Command 4

E7 E8 E7 or E8

E7 and E8 LOG (E7 and E8)

TABLE 10 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION

* * For more details on delay parameters, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-008.

** When a command is programmed in reverse logic, if the acquisition input is idle, teleprotection sends a permanent command.

Page 134: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 20/44 e-terragridcom DIP

6.4.7 Configuring application parameters

Refer to the § Configuring the application parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter / HMI § Configuring application parameters

Parameter value (*)

Holding delay / Transmission 1 Holding-……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Transmission 2 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Transmission 3 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Transmission 4 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

20 to 250 ms

Holding delay / Transmission 5 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Transmission 6 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Transmission 7 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Transmission 8 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Relay state on alarm / command 1 idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 2 Idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 3 Idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 4 Idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 5 idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 6 Idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 7 Idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 8 Idle Former State

Page 135: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/44

Parameter / HMI § Configuring application parameters

Parameter value (*)

1 -………………

2 -………………

3 -………………

Restitution / Holding in operation 4 -……………… 1 to 3000 ms

5 -………………

6 -………………

7 -………………

8 -………………

Type of reception commands 1/2 Permissive tripping

Blocking

Remote trigger

Type of reception commands 3/4 Permissive tripping

Blocking

Remote trigger

Type of reception commands 5/6 Permissive tripping

Blocking

Remote trigger

Type of reception commands 7/8 Permissive tripping

Blocking

Remote trigger

TABLE 11 – APPLICATION PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION

* For more details on delay parameters, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-008.

6.4.8 Configuring alarm parameters

Refer to the § Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.

Page 136: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 22/44 e-terragridcom DIP

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter / HMI § Configuring alarms parameters

Parameter value

Minor alarm threshold on bit error rate (BER)

1. 00E -3 1. 00E-4 1.00E-5 1.00 E-6

Major alarm threshold on bit error rate (BER)

1. 00E -1 1. 00E -2 1.00E-3

Alarm on prolonged command

Type

Duration

YES NO

Minor Major

................... 1 to 30 s

Communication time alarm

Type

Delay

YES NO

Minor Major

................... 1 to 20 ms

Output delay major alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

Output delay major alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

Output delay major minor alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

Output delay major minor alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

TABLE 12 – ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION

6.4.9 Entering comments

Refer to the § Entering comments in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter / HMI § Entering comments

Parameter value

Name of source station

Name of destination station

Comments

TABLE 13 – COMMENTS PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION

6.4.10 Saving the configuration

Send the configuration to the DIP and save it (refer to the § Configuring the Windows file in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter).

Page 137: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/44

6.5 Configuring DIP Single tone analog version

For more details on the configuration procedures of DIP Single tone analog, refer to the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter. Each step of the procedure corresponds to a paragraph in the HMI chapter.

The configuration procedure is as follows:

• Creating a user password

• Configuring General Parameters

• Configuring Sender Parameters

• Configuring Receiver Parameters

• Configuring I/O parameters

• Configuring alarm parameters

• Saving the configuration

6.5.1 Creating a user password

Access to the configuration parameters of the DIP is protected by password. The intervention level granted to a user depends on the password.

To create a user password, refer to § DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP Analog.

6.5.2 Configuring General Parameters

Refer to the § Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure or enter the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

The grayed out lines correspond to the mandatory minimum configuration of the parameters.

Default parameter values are in bold.

Parameter / HMI § Configuring general parameters

Parameter value

Number of orders 2 commands 4 commands

IRIG-B Enabled Disabled

Mode selection Normal Extended

Logical address* ……………. 0 to 255

Limitation of the number of events and alarms / Limitation of histories to 255

Yes (255) No (1785)

HMI Speed

19200 bit / s 4800 bit / s

2400 bit / s 1200 bit / s

600 bit / s

Link test

Hour and minutes

Minutes

Disabled

Daily …………H ……………mn

Hourly ……………………….mn

Comments / Source station

Comments / Destination station

Comments / Comments

TABLE 14 – GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION

* This parameter is not used currently.

Page 138: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 24/44 e-terragridcom DIP

6.5.3 Configuring Sender Parameters

Refer to the § Configuring the sender parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter name / HMI § Configuring sender parameters

Parameter value

Sender LF Band Bandwidth

§ Configuring Sender LF Band

300-2000 Hz

300-2400 Hz

300-3400 Hz

Sender LF Band Guard

§ Configuring Sender LF Band

2240 Hz

2600 Hz

3680 Hz

Guard source

§ Configuring Guard source

Internal

External

Transmission level / Guard …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 1 …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 2 ………………………… -30 to +6dBm

Transmission level / Frequency 3 …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 4 …………………………

Input Validation delay / Command 1 …………………………

Input Validation delay / Command 2 ………………………… 0 to 5ms

Input Validation delay / Command 3 …………………………

Input Validation delay / Command 4 …………………………

Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 1

Holding-……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 2

Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

20 to 500 ms

Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 3

Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 4

Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Type of application / Command 1 Permissive tripping

Blocking

Direct tripping

Type of application / Command 2 Permissive tripping

Blocking

Direct tripping

Type of application / Command 3 Permissive tripping

Blocking

Direct tripping

Type of application / Command 4 Permissive tripping

Blocking

Direct tripping

TABLE 15 – SENDER PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION

Page 139: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/44

6.5.4 Configuring Receiver Parameters

Refer to the § Configuring the receiver parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters

Parameter Values

Useful band/ Commands 300-2000 Hz 300-2400 Hz

300-3400 Hz

Useful band/ Guard 2100/2300 Hz 2400/2660 Hz

3500/3800 Hz

Reception / Guard level …………………… - 40 to 0 dBm

Command / Guard relative frequency level

……………… /.0 to -6 dBm normal version

…………… /0 to -16 dBm advanced version

Holding delay command 1 ………………………

Holding delay command 2 ……………………… 0 to 3000 ms

Holding delay command 3 ………………………

Holding delay command 4 ………………………

Command 1 Relay State on AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI

Idle State Former State

Command 2 Relay State on AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI

Idle State Former State

Command 3 Relay State on AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI

Idle State Former State

Command 4 Relay State on AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI

Idle State Former State

Command 1 Protection Scheme/

§ Configuring protection schemes

Permissive tripping

Blocking

Direct tripping

Command 2 Protection Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes

Permissive tripping

Blocking

Direct tripping

Command 3 Protection Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes

Permissive tripping

Blocking

Direct tripping

Command 4 Protection Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes

Permissive tripping

Blocking

Direct tripping

Unblocking command 1 Unblocking

Unblocking command 2 Unblocking

Unblocking command 3 Unblocking

Unblocking command 4 Unblocking

Unblocking threshold ………………………. - 20 to -10 dB

Unblocking validation delay ………………………. 5 to 100 ms

Unblocking holding delay ………………………. 30 to 500 ms

TABLE 16 – RECEIVER PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION

Page 140: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 26/44 e-terragridcom DIP

6.5.5 Configuring I/O parameters

Refer to the § Configuring the I/O parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter / HMI § I/O configuration Parameter value

Configuring I/O boards 1 board 2 boards

Command 1 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay

………………………. - 0 to 3 ms

Command 2 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay

………………………. - 0 to 3 ms

Command 3 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay

………………………. - 0 to 3 ms

Command 4 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay

………………………. - 0 to 3 ms

Command 1 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

IN1 IN2

IN1 or IN2 IN1 and IN2

Command 2 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

IN3 IN4

IN3 or IN4 IN3 and IN4

Command 3 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

IN5 IN6

IN5 or IN6 IN5 and IN6

Command 4 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

IN7 IN8

IN7 or IN8 IN7 and IN8

TABLE 17 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION

6.5.6 Alarms parameters – Single tone

Refer to the § Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Page 141: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/44

Parameter name / HMI § Configuring alarms parameters

Parameter value

Alarm on external input

Type

Delay

YES NO

Minor Major

................... 0 to 2.5 s

Input Command Duration Alarm

Type

Duration

YES NO

Minor Major

................... 0.5 to 10 s

Loss of Signal Alarm Threshold

Delay

................... -15 to – 6dBr

................... 1 to 10 s

Locking alarm

Delay

YES NO

................... 0.5 to 10 s

Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

TABLE 18 – ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION

6.5.7 Saving the configuration

Save the configuration (refer to the § Configuring the File menu in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter).

6.6 Configuring DIP Analogue Dual Tone

For more details on the configuration procedures of DIP Dual tone analog, refer to the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter.

The configuration procedure is as follows:

• Creating a password

• Configuring General Parameters

• Configuring Sender Parameters

• Configuring Receiver Parameters

• Configuring I/O parameters

• Configuring alarm parameters

• Saving the configuration

6.6.1 Creating a password

Access to the configuration parameters of the DIP is protected by password. The intervention level granted to a user depends on the password.

To create a user password, refer to § DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP Analog.

6.6.2 Configuring general parameters - Dual tone analog version

Refer to the § Configuring the general parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

The grayed out lines correspond to the mandatory minimum configuration of the parameters.

Default parameter values are in bold.

Page 142: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 28/44 e-terragridcom DIP

Parameter / HMI § Configuring general parameters

Parameter value

IRIG-B on off

Logical address ……………. 0 to 255

Limitation of the number of events and alarms / Limitation of histories to 255

Yes (255)* No (1785)

HMI Speed

19200 bit / s 4800 bit / s

2400 bit / s 1200 bit / s

600 bit / s

Link test

Hour and minutes

Minutes

Disabled

Daily …………H ……………mn

Hourly ...………………….……mn

Comments / Source station

Comments / Destination station

Comments / Comments

TABLE 19 – GENERAL PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE

* Limitation to 255 when the DIP is supervised..

6.6.3 Configuring sender parameters - Dual tone version

Refer to the § Configuring the sender parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure or enter the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters

Parameter value

Useful band / Commands 300-1900 Hz 400-2000 Hz

670-2260 Hz 850-2450 Hz

1040-2630 Hz 1220-2810 Hz

1400-3000 Hz 1590-3180 Hz

2000-3600 Hz

Transmission level / Guard …………………………

-30 to +6dBm

Transmission level / Frequency 1 …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 2 …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 3 …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 4 …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 5 …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 6 …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 7 …………………………

Transmission level / Frequency 8 …………………………

Input Validation delay / Command 1 …………………………

Input Validation delay / Command 2 …………………………

Input Validation delay / Command 3 …………………………

Input Validation delay / Command 4 …………………………

Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 1 Holding-……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 2 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

20 to 500 ms

Page 143: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/44

Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters

Parameter value

Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 3 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 4 Holding -……………….

Pulsed -…………….

Type of application / Command 1 Permissive tripping Reinforced

Blocking Reinforced

Direct tripping Reinforced

Type of application / Command 2 Permissive tripping Reinforced

Blocking Reinforced

Direct tripping Reinforced

Type of application / Command 3 Permissive tripping Reinforced

Blocking Reinforced

Direct tripping Reinforced

Type of application / Command 4 Permissive tripping Reinforced

Blocking Reinforced

Direct tripping Reinforced

TABLE 20 – SENDER PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE

6.6.4 Configuring receiver parameters - Dual tone version

Refer to the § Configuring the receiver parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters

Parameter value

Useful band / Commands 300-1900 Hz 400-2000 Hz

670-2260 Hz 850-2450 Hz

1040-2630 Hz 1220-2810 Hz

1400-3000 Hz 1590-3180 Hz

2000-3600 Hz

Reception / Guard level …………………… - 40 to 0 dBm

Command / Guard relative frequency level ……………… /.6 to -6 dBm normal version

…………… /0 to -16 dBm advanced version

Holding delay command 1 ………………………

Holding delay command 2 ………………………

Holding delay command 3 ………………………

Holding delay command 4 ………………………

Relay state on alarm / command 1 idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 2 Idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 3 Idle Former State

Relay state on alarm / command 4 Idle Former State

Type of application / Command 1 Permissive tripping Reinforced

Blocking Reinforced Direct tripping Reinforced

Page 144: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 30/44 e-terragridcom DIP

Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters

Parameter value

Type of application / Command 2 Permissive tripping Reinforced

Blocking Reinforced Direct tripping Reinforced

Type of application / Command 3 Permissive tripping Reinforced

Blocking Reinforced Direct tripping Reinforced

Type of application / Command 4 Permissive tripping Reinforced

Blocking Reinforced Direct tripping Reinforced

Unblocking command 1 Unblocking

Unblocking command 2 Unblocking

Unblocking command 3 Unblocking

Unblocking command 4 Unblocking

Unblocking threshold …………………… - 20 to 10 dB

Unblocking Validation delay ………………………. 5 to 100 ms

Unblocking Holding delay ………………………. 30 to 500 ms

TABLE 21 – RECEIVER PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE ANALOG

6.6.5 Configuring I/O parameters - Dual tone version

Refer to the § Configuring the I/O parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter / HMI § I/O configuration Parameter value

Configuring I/O boards 1 board 2 boards

Command 1 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay

…………… - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms)

Command 2 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay

…………… - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms)

Command 3 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay

…………… - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms)

Command 4 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay

…………… - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms)

Command 1 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

IN1 IN2

IN1 or IN2 IN1 and IN2

Command 2 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

IN3 IN4

IN3 or IN4 IN3 and IN4

Command 3 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

IN5 IN6

IN5 or IN6 IN5 and IN6

Command 4 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

IN7 IN8

IN7 or IN8 IN7 and IN8

TABLE 22 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – DUAL TONE

Page 145: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/44

6.6.6 Configuring alarms parameters - Dual tone version

Refer to the § Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.

Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:

Parameter name / HMI § Configuring alarms parameters

Parameter value

Alarm on external input

Type

Delay

YES NO

Minor Major

....................... 0 to 2.5 s

Input Command Duration Alarm

Type

Duration

YES NO

Minor Major

........................ 0.5 to 10 s

Loss of Signal Alarm Threshold

Delay

................... -16 to – 6dBr

........................ 1 to 10 s

Noise alarm Threshold

Delay

................... -6 to +12 dBr

........................ 1 to 10 s

Alarm on link test failure Minor Major

Locking alarm

Delay

YES NO

........................ 0.5 to 10 s

Saturation threshold alarm ................... +8 to +14 dBr

Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec

TABLE 23 – ALARMS PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE

6.6.7 Saving the configuration

Save the configuration (refer to the § Configuring the File menu in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter).

6.7 Final status of the configuration step

At the end of the configuration step:

• The passwords are created.

• The configuration file is saved and ready to be sent to the DIP unit.

Page 146: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 32/44 e-terragridcom DIP

7. TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION

The objective of this step consists in checking:

• compliance of the configuration file saved with the equipment,

• the operational status of the DIP equipment.

7.1 Initial status

The configuration file is saved and ready to be sent to the DIP.

7.2 Checking procedure

• Send the configuration to the DIP which is reset

For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the § Sending a configuration file in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter.

For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the § Sending a configuration file in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP Analog chapter.

• Check the status of LEDs after the reset and lack of alarms.

If LEDs report an alarm status:

• Read the alarms.

For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the § Reading alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter.

For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the § Reading alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP ANALOG chapter.

Once the alarm identified, apply the corresponding resolution procedure of the § TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION in the MAINTENANCE chapter.

Page 147: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/44

7.3 Final status

At the end of this step, the DIP equipment is configured and ready to be used.

Start

Send the

configuration

Alarm state OK

after reset ?

State of hardware

alarms OK ?

Read the alarms and

record the nature of

the fault displayed.

Repair

(See § Tests and

troubleshooting)

End

No

Yes

Yes

No

D0613FRa

FIGURE 7 - TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION

Page 148: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 34/44 e-terragridcom DIP

8. OPERATING CHECKS

8.1 Initial status

The DIP equipment is ready to be used, but not connected.

8.2 Procedure

This procedure consists in:

− Checking user connections (rear panel) and the jumpers 1-2 ‘Terminal block presence’.

− Set the date and time on the unit.

− Save the configuration file.

− Clear the event and alarm log.

− Perform self-checks.

− Perform online checks.

Start

Check ‘user’ connections

(rear connectors)

Set the time on the unit

Menu <Date/Write/Local>

Save the configuration

in a backup file Menu <Read/Local>

Command <Configuration>Menu <File><File/Save>

Clear the alarms and

events log

Check locally

Check on line

End

D0614FRa

FIGURE 7 – FINAL CHECKS AND CONFIGURATION

Page 149: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/44

8.3 Self-checks

8.3.1 Alarms forcing

Alarm forcing allows to check the operational status of alarms.

To force an alarm:

For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the § Forcing alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter.

For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the § Forcing alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP ANALOG chapter.

8.3.2 Maintenance forcing commands

When the DIP equipment is not connected to the transmission medium, apply the maintenance forcing commands and check the results.

For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the § Maintenance in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter.

For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the § DIP Maintenance Menu in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP ANALOG chapter.

8.3.3 Forcing PLC commands

Only when a PLC is present, use the PLC forcing commands and check the results. Refer to the § Forcing PLC commands in the Human Machine Interface–DIP Analog.

8.4 Online checks

When two DIPs are linked, no alarm must appear. Otherwise, refer to the maintenance manual

8.5 Final status

The DIP unit is fully operational.

Page 150: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 36/44 e-terragridcom DIP

9. APPENDIX A

9.1 Implantation diagram of the UT148 / UT148D board

IR 1xx communication

interface board

Optional

IRIG-BIR184 board

Timer

D0131 Frd

Lo

ca

tio

n o

f o

ptional

ME

50

bo

ard

Status of the lamps in normal operation:

V1 Green on

V8 Green fast flashing

V7 Off

The IR1xx communication interface board may be absent in case of optical transmission.

Page 151: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/44

9.2 Implantation diagram of the SR11x board and jumper settings

D0132XXa

K5

K6

K7

K8

K9

K10

K11

K12

K4

K3

K2

K1

1

2

3

S 2

12

3

S 3

1

23

S 4

1

2

3

S 5V 5

V 6

V 7

V 8

V 1

V 2

V 3

V 4

P1

P2

P3

MAX

7000

S1

U4

Position of the jumpers

The jumpers S2 to S5 allow selecting the range of voltage values according to the level of the input command.

Position SR114 SR114D SR115 SR116

1 - 2 220 V –250 Vdc 220 V –250 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc 110 V -127 Vdc

2 - 3 48 V -127 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc 24 Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc

Page 152: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 38/44 e-terragridcom DIP

9.3 Implantation diagram of the SR200 board and jumper settings

Position of the jumpers

The jumpers JP1, JP3, JP5 and JP7 allow selecting the range of voltage values according to the level of the input command.

Position SR200 Minimum Maximum

1 - 2 24Vdc 18 Vdc 30 Vdc

3 - 4 48 V -60 Vdc 36 Vdc 75 Vdc

5 - 6 110-127 Vdc 83 Vdc 158 Vdc

7 - 8 220-250 Vdc 165 Vdc 312 Vdc

If the daughter board FI005 is present on the SR200 board, the jumpers must be set to 1-2, in which case acquisition of the command is ensured by dry loop.

The position of the FI005 board is marked by its outline in the figure above.

Page 153: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/44

The jumpers JP9 to JP32 allow to fit (or not) the static relay in addition to the mechanical relay.

Position 1 – 2 Position 2 – 3 Command

JP9 – JP10 Command output

on mechanical relay and static relay in parallel

Command output on mechanical

relay only

1 or 5

JP11 – JP12 2 or 6

JP13 – JP14 3 or 7

JP15 – JP16 4 or 8

JP17 – JP18

Command copy output on

mechanical relay and static relay in

parallel

Command copy output on

mechanical relay only

the allocation of the copy outputs is detailed in the INSTALLATION

part

JP19 – JP20

JP21 – JP22

JP23 – JP24

JP25 – JP26

JP27 – JP28

JP29 – JP30

JP31 – JP32

Page 154: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 40/44 e-terragridcom DIP

9.4 Implantation diagram of the AL137 and AL140 board

The +5v and 0v test points allow to check the voltage delivered by the board.

The S1 switch allows power on the DIP.

F1 : Protection fuse : 800mA , T, 250V,20/5

9.5 Implantation diagram of the AL139 board

There are two versions of AL139 board, which differ only by the CONV.1 converter.

The +5v and 0v test points allow to check the voltage delivered by the board.

The INT.1 switch allows to power on the DIP.

F1 : Protection fuse : 3,15A , T, 250V,20/5

Page 155: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/44

9.6 Implantation diagram of the IR183 board

E1

E6

E4

E5

E2

S6

S5

C4

C1

C2

C7

C5

C8

C1

1

C1

2

C1

6

C10

S4

S2

U7

C4

0 +

C1

5

+ C

9C4

1

U9

U1

3

C1

4

U5

U3

C3

9

R3

U6

C3

4C

31

U8 C

32

C2

0C

28

C3

0R

32

R2

4

U1

4

Q5

Q7

Q6

Q1

D7

D9

D8

R15 R

13

R1

4

R1

9R

17

R2

1

R1

8U

10

R2

0

Impedance of the BF output

1 – 2

By default 2 - 3

S5 600 Ω High impedance

S6

P9-P10 = transmission measurement points.

P11-P12 = reception measurement points.

Page 156: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 42/44 e-terragridcom DIP

9.7 Implantation diagram of the FI002 board and jumper settings

Each filter is programmed via 3 jumpers J1x, J2x and J3x. Each jumper is identified on the board. The jumper positions are indicated in the figure below:

Command 4 filter

Command 3 filter

Command 2 filter

Command 1 filter

D0495FRa

Each filter can be configured for the nominal voltage of the input command, as specified in the table below.

Input command voltage J1 J2 J3

48 Vdc Closed Open Open

110 - 127 Vdc Open Closed Closed

220 Vdc Open Closed Open

Page 157: DIP User Manual

Commissioning

DIP/EN CM/B23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/44

9.8 Implantation diagram of the IR185 board and jumper settings

Tx LED

Rx LED

J1

3

45

2

10

6

78

9

U2

U10

U9U8

D0496 Frb

J3

U11

U4U3

D1

D2

32

1

32

1

32

1

JP3 JP2 JP132

1

JP5

JTAG

J2

SP1

Green LED on

Red FGPA not loaded LED

Rotating switch

Test jumperPower supply jumper

Rotating switch J1 JP1 /JP2 /JP3 Speed

Test mode N = 0 1-2 N/A – The test mode is used in the factory to test the board without DIP connection

Normal maintenance

N = 1 to 8 2-3 Nx64 kbps

Page 158: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN CM/B23

Commissioning

Page 44/44 e-terragridcom DIP

9.9 Implantation diagram of the IR187 board and jumper settings

D0646FRa

J3

SP1

D1

D2

JTAG/RS232J2

SFP module cage

J1

3

45

2

10

6

78

9

TP2

TP4

TP8

TP3

TP1

TP9

GND

TP12 TP11

TP7 TP6

GND +5V

GND

GND

TP5

+2.5V

TR

AC

O

PO

WE

R

TP10

JP2 JP1

3

2

1

32

1

The two jumpers JP1 and JP2 and position of the rotating switch allow to configure the board as follow:

Coding wheel J1 JP1 JP2 Speed

IR182 mode N = 1 1-2 2-3 256 kbps

C37.94 Mode N = 1 to 8 2-3 1-2 Nx64 kbps

Page 159: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23 e-terragridcom DIP

MAINTENANCE

Page 160: DIP User Manual
Page 161: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/40

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 5

2. INTRODUCTION 6

3. MONITORING 7

3.1 Monitoring LEDs 7

3.2 Messages 9

3.3 LED – Relay information 9

3.4 Push buttons 10

4. HMI MAINTENANCE FEATURES 11

4.1 Snapshot window 11

4.2 Maintenance test commands 11

4.3 Instant reading of alarms – DIGITAL DIP HMI 11

4.4 Reading an alarms list DIP DIGITAL 12

4.5 Reading alarms DIP IHM ANALOG 12

4.6 Reading an alarms list DIP ANALOG 13

5. TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION 14

5.1 Checks before repair 14

5.2 Fault isolation procedure 14

5.3 Troubleshooting procedures 14

5.4 Warning and error messages 33

6. CLASSIFICATION OF FAULTS 35

7. UPDATE OF THE DIP FIRMWARE 37

7.1 Overview 37

7.2 Prior conditions 37

7.3 Installing files on the PC 37

7.4 Transferring update files 38

7.5 Connecting the DIP 40

Page 162: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 2/40 e-terragridcom DIP

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 – INDICATION LED AND PUSH BUTTONS 7

FIGURE 2 – POWER ON ALARMS 16

FIGURE 3 – POWER ON ALARMS – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FAULT 17

FIGURE 4 – POWER ON ALARMS – SRXXX COHERENCE FAULT 17

FIGURE 5 – POWER ON ALARMS – IRIG-B COHERENCE FAULT 18

FIGURE 6 – POWER ON ALARMS – CONFIGURATION CHECKSUM FAULT 19

FIGURE 7 – POWER ON ALARMS – LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST FAULT 19

FIGURE 8 – HARDWARE STATUS 20

FIGURE 9 – HARDWARE STATUS - SRXXX MODULE TEST FAULT 21

FIGURE 10 – HARDWARE STATUS - TERMINAL BLOCK PRESENCE FAULT 22

FIGURE 11 – HARDWARE STATUS - AL13X OE AL14X SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAULT 23

FIGURE 12 – HARDWARE STATUS - TIME-STAMP BATTERY VOLTAGE FAULT 23

FIGURE 13 – HARDWARE STATUS - LINK TEST ALARM 24

FIGURE 14 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION 25

FIGURE 15 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – BIT ERROR RATE 26

FIGURE 16 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – SYNCH LOSS 27

FIGURE 17 – REMOTE ALARMS 28

FIGURE 18 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE 28

FIGURE 19 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – TRANSMISSION TIME 29

FIGURE 20 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – TX COMMAND TIME 29

FIGURE 21 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION 30

FIGURE 22 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION – NO GUARD / LOW LEVEL / NOISE - BLOCKING 31

FIGURE 23 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION – EXTERNAL ALARM 32

FIGURE 24 – MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES 33

FIGURE 25 – MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES (CONT’D) 34

Page 163: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/40

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS

A 28/12/2000 Original issue

B 24/04/2001 Added the optical interface

C 05/11/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version

D 14/11/2007 New structure. New writing. Added a paragraph on updating the firmware, creation of the test and fault isolation procedure.

E 29/02/2008 Minor correction

A22 20/07/2009 Version 2.2

B22 23/12/2009 Minor corrections, added SR200 I/O and IR187 optical interface.

A23 04/01/2011 Version 2.3

Page 164: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 4/40 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 165: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/40

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.

(1) As per the option chosen

Page 166: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 6/40 e-terragridcom DIP

2. INTRODUCTION

This section includes two parts:

• Tests and repair: this part presents a classification of faults, describes the maintenance tools and indicates the repair procedures.

• Firmware updating procedure.

Page 167: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/40

3. MONITORING

The monitoring resources available with the DIP equipment are the following:

• Monitoring information by LEDs and relays,

• Notification messages,

3.1 Monitoring LEDs

The LEDs, located on the front face of the DIP equipment display monitoring information (refer to table 1 - Indication of the LEDs).

The system’s operation is monitored by these LEDs, as well as by four alarm relays (two dedicated to major alarms and two others to minor alarms).

Alarms requiring maintenance action are notified by the status of these LEDs are relays.

Opt . link

Optical interface

indicator lights

MAIN POWER

MAJO R ALARM

MINOR ALARM

Power supply indicator lights

AUX . POWER

D0136 FRb

FIGURE 1 – INDICATION LED AND PUSH BUTTONS

The following tables indicate the information notified by the LEDs.

The information of the V2, V4 and V6 LEDs depend on the ANALOG or DIGITAL version, the appropriate lines are displayed in grey in the table.

Page 168: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 8/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Description UT148

Main power supply

Auxiliary power supply

Activity Lamp Color Comment

GE

NE

RA

L

Power supply voltage present x x

Voltage present

Voltage absent

Green

Off

Fixed

Major alarm x

Normal

Alarm

Off

Red

Fixed

Minor alarm x

Normal

Alarm

Off

Red

Fixed

Local loop back x

Normal

Loopback

V3 Off

Yellow

Fixed

Battery fault x

Normal

Fault

V9 Off

Red

Fixed

Command outputs x

Normal

Blocked

V5 Off

Yellow

Fixed

DIG

ITA

L

Remote loopback

x

Normal

Remote loopback equipment

V2 Off

Yellow

Fixed

Receiver synchronization x

Synchronized

Non synchronized

V4 Green

Off

Fixed

Remote alarm x

Normal

Remote alarm

V6 Off

Red

Fixed

AN

AL

OG

Rx / Guard level

x

Normal

No guard signal / Low level

V4 Green

Off

Fixed

x

Normal

No guard signal / Low level

V6 Off

Red

Fixed

Link test x

Test message emission

Link test fault V2

Orange

Orange

Fixed for 2s

Fixed

TABLE 1 – LED INDICATION

Page 169: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/40

Teledetection status UT148 lamp

V1 (STATUS) UT148 lamp V8 (STATUS)

UT148 lamp V7 (STATUS)

Normal operation Green on Green fast flashing Off

Normal operation after cold start

Green on Yellow fast flashing Off

Initializing Green on Red fast flashing Off

Alarm on power on test Red fast flashing Red fast flashing Off

Configuration writing in Flash EPROM

Red slow flashing Red slow flashing Off

Storage status (time stamp battery isolated)

Fast toggling from green to yellow then red

Fast toggling from green to yellow then red

Maintenance Green on Fast green flashing or fast yellow flashing

Yellow on

Remote equipment loopback Green on Fast green flashing or fast yellow flashing

Yellow fast flashing

Waiting for code transfer for Flash memory

Yellow slow flashing Yellow slow flashing Yellow fast flashing

Transferring code Green at 0 s rate of data transmitted

Green at 1 s rate of data transmitted

Yellow fast flashing

Writing code in Flash memory

Red slow flashing Red slow flashing Yellow fast flashing

TABLE 2 – INDICATION OF ‘STATUS’ AND ‘MAINTENANCE’ LEDS

Mode LED Signaling Status

All TX Green on Normal emission

IR187 TX /RX Alternate orange flashing No SFP module

IR182

Or

IR187

RX Green on Normal reception

TX Slow yellow flashing No signal from UT148

TX Fast red flashing Transmitter fault

RX Slow yellow flashing No Signal received activity

RX Fast red flashing Low optical power level (LOS)

IR185

Or

IR187

TX Yellow on Yellow Bit

TX Red on No signal from UT148

RX Red on No optical signal received (LOS)

RX Yellow on AIS reception

RX Red flashing Frame loss (LOF)

TABLE 3 – INDICATION OF LEDS ON OPTICAL INTERFACE

3.2 Messages

Notification messages are displayed to notify the user in case of error and risk of untimely commands. They also provide instructions for fault resolving.

3.3 LED – Relay information

The information of the ‘MAJOR ALARM’ and ‘MINOR ALARM’ LEDs (see Figure 1) is associated with the alarm status of the relays.

Page 170: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 10/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Each alarm is associated with two independent contacts, with a closing time (0 s, 2.5 s, 5 s or 10 s) which can be configured with the HMI (refer to the chapter ‘Human Machine Interface’).

These contacts are normally open in standard or normally closed with the AL142 and AL143 boards.

3.4 Push buttons

The S1 and S2 push buttons are accessible when the door is open (see Figure 1).

The S1 button allows to reset the DIP unit.

The S2 button:

• is not used in the digital version of the equipment (factory test),

• is used to launch a link test in the analog version.

Page 171: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/40

4. HMI MAINTENANCE FEATURES

The RS232C communication port fitted on the front panel is an ultra low voltage circuit (ULV) ensuring basic isolation against electric shock. When powering on the teleprotection, the terminals of this port must not be touched to prevent any risk of electric shock in case of fault. This port is designed to be used for maintenance, i.e. monitoring and downloading software, it must not be connected permanently.

The front panel mounted RJ45(1)

communication port is an extra low voltage circuit ensuring basic insulation against electric shock. This port is designed to be used for maintenance, i.e. monitoring and downloading software.

(1) As per the option chosen

4.1 Snapshot window

The HMI software allows monitoring alarms via an instant status window and reading event and alarm files.

Events and alarms are saved in a file, accessible via the History menu.

The alarms monitored depend on the type of DIP, DIGITAL or ANALOG.

The corresponding alarm windows and files are described separately, in the following paragraphs. According to the version of the DIP, refer to the appropriate paragraphs.

4.2 Maintenance test commands

The maintenance instructions, used to analyze malfunctions and launch tests, are available via the HMI:

• Locking to lock / unlock either the link between units or the link with the protection relay connected to the unit.

• Loop to launch a loop between the transmitter and receiver.

• Forcing commands to check availability of features.

• Interface forcing (only on DIP DIGITAL).

• Reset.

For more information on the use of these MAINTENANCE functions, refer to the § Maintenance Menu in the DIP HMI chapter for the DIGITAL or ANALOG version.

4.3 Instant reading of alarms – DIGITAL DIP HMI

Refer to the § Instant reading of alarms in the HMI-DIP DIGITAL chapter.

The alarms monitored are:

Power on alarms

• Flash EPROM check

• DSP internal RAM check

• External RAM check

• CRC configuration

• Communication interface

• SR board missing

• Failed IRIG-B loopback test

• Failed loopback test

Page 172: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 12/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Alarms on the status of the equipment

• Test fault I/O board no.1

• Fault terminal block no.1

• Test fault I/O board no.2

• Fault terminal block no.2

• Main power supply fault

• Auxiliary power supply fault

• Battery voltage fault

• Command timeout

Alarms on communication

• Bit error rate / MAJAL

• Bit error rate / MINAL

• Loss of synchronization

• Remote major alarm

• Remote minor alarm

• Transmission time

For more information, refer to the HMI-DIP DIGITAL chapter.

4.4 Reading an alarms list DIP DIGITAL

Refer to the § Reading the list of alarms in the HMI-DIP DIGITAL chapter.

4.5 Reading alarms DIP IHM ANALOG

Refer to the § Instant reading of alarms in the HMI-DIP ANALOG chapter.

The alarms monitored are:

Power on alarms

• Failed Flash memory test

• Failed internal DSP RAM test

• Failed external DSP RAM test

• CRC error configuration database

• Communication interface error

• I/O power supply board missing

• Missing IRIG-B

• Failed loopback test

Page 173: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/40

Alarms on the status of the equipment

• Failed test I/O board no.1

• Missing terminal block no.1

• Failed test I/O board no.2

• No terminal block no.2

• Main power supply fault

• Auxiliary source fault

• Battery voltage fault

• Link test alarm

Alarms on communication

• Low level alarm

• Blocking

• External alarm

• Noise

• Tx command time alarm

4.6 Reading an alarms list DIP ANALOG

Refer to the § Reading the list of alarms in the HMI-DIP ANALOG chapter.

Page 174: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 14/40 e-terragridcom DIP

5. TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION

5.1 Checks before repair

In case of malfunction, check the following points before applying the fault isolation procedure:

• Proper application of the power supply voltage to the DIP (power supply LED not lit).

• Wiring.

• External connection and circuit to which the DIP is connected (protection side, transmission medium, power supply, external alarm).

• Aspect of the mother board.

If communication between the PC HMI and the DIP cannot be set up, check the cable’s connection on the DIP side and PC side. Open the front panel of the DIP and check, if required, the internal connection between the RS 232 connector and the UT 148 board.

5.2 Fault isolation procedure

Most faults are notified by the LEDs (see § 3.1).

If a LED reports an alarm:

1. Determine the cause of the alarm using table 1.

2. Connect the PC and launch the HMI.

3. Read the alarm instant and notification messages.

4. Apply the repair procedure associated with the alarm (refer to the next paragraph Startup procedure).

Note: When replacing a board, apply the startup procedure (refer to the COMMISSIONING chapter).

In case of complex fault which cannot be resolved by a repair procedure (several simultaneous faults or failures with multiples impacts), use the maintenance commands and test tools (see § 4.2) to analyze or process the fault (a reset command may be useful).

5.3 Troubleshooting procedures

How to use this paragraph:

In case of alarm notification, refer to the associated figures:

• Figures 2 to 7 – Power on alarms (Digital and Analog)

• Figures 8 to 13 – Equipment status (Digital and Analog)

• Figures 14 to 21 – Communication alarms - Digital version

• Figures 22 to 24 – Communication alarms – Analog version

Note: In the following figures, the indications of the LEDs have been

translated. However, the actual indications on the front panel are shown in figure 1.

Page 175: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/40

PRECAUTIONS

INSERTING ELECTRONIC MODULES AND BOARDS:

THE ELECTRONIC MODULES AND BOARDS MUST BE NEITHER INSERTED NOR REMOVED FROM LIVE EQUIPMENT UNDER PAIN OF DAMAGE.

WHEN CHANGING A BOARD, CHECK THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION OF THE SPARE BOARD, WHICH MUST BE IDENTICAL.

BEFORE ANY INTERVENTION ON THE OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD, REMOVE ITS FASTENING SCREWS ON THE REAR PANEL.

THE OPTICAL BOARDS MUST BE FASTENED WITH THEIR SCREWS BEFORE CONNECTING THE OPTICAL FIBERS.

Page 176: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 16/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Power on alarms

Alarms at power on

Flash EPROM

DSP RAMRAM timer

Communication interface fault

IRIG-B coherence fault

Configuration checksum fault

Local loopback test fault

All these faults are

irreversible major faults

SUPPLY 1

MAJOR ALARM

Replaces the UT148 module148

I/O board coherence fault

See figure 3

D0137 FRd

Maintenance

Verr B.L SYNC AL. STATUT BAT.Maint

Lien

B.D/T

Maintenance

Verr B.L SYNC AL. STATUT BAT.Maint

Lien

B.D/T

SUPPLY 2

MINOR ALARM

Fault:

See figure 4

See figure 5

See figure 6

See figure 3

FIGURE 2 – POWER ON ALARMS

Page 177: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/40

Communication interface fault

Check that the Irxxx board is present

Is the board

present ?

Configuration

correct ?

Check the coherence / configuration

of the interface board

Fault of one of the modules

Change the UT148 board

and Irxxx board

The processor does not

recognise the communication

interface board

Insert the Irxxx board in its slot

Change the configuration

or the Irxxx module

Fault of the UT148

or Irxxx board

Yes

Yes

No

No

D0138 FRb

FIGURE 3 – POWER ON ALARMS – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FAULT

SRxxx coherence fault

Check that the number of SRxxx

defined in the configuration

matches the number of

boards present.

Coherence correct ?

Fault of one of the modules

Change the faulty module

The configuration does

not correspond to

the number of boards present.

Change the configuration or

install a 2nd SRxxx board

Fault of the UT148 or SRxxx

boards or FB180 mother board

Yes

No

D0139FRe

FIGURE 4 – POWER ON ALARMS – SRXXX COHERENCE FAULT

Page 178: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 18/40 e-terragridcom DIP

IRIG-B coherence fault

Check that the IRIG-B interface

board is present

Is the board

present ?

Config

OK ?

Fault of one of the modules

Change the UT148 board

and/or IRIG-B board

Insert the IRIG-B board in its slot

Fault of the UT148

and/or IRIG-B board

Change the configuration

or IRIG-B board

Check the coherence / configuration

of the IRIG-B board

The processor does not

recognise the IRIG-B

interface board

Yes

Yes

No

No

D0140 FRa

FIGURE 5 – POWER ON ALARMS – IRIG-B COHERENCE FAULT

Page 179: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/40

Checksum fault

END

Reload the configuration

from the HMI

Fault cleared ?

Fault of the UT148 module

Change the UT148 module

The configuration

saved in the

Flash Eprom is corrupted

Faulty component on

the UT148 board

Yes

No

D0141FRb

FIGURE 6 – POWER ON ALARMS – CONFIGURATION CHECKSUM FAULT

Local loopback test fault

Fault on the Irxx communication

interface board or

the UT148 board

Change the Irxx board

Fault cleared ?

Fault of the UT148 module

Change the UT148 module

The local loopback test

on the communication

interface board has failed

Yes

Yes

END

D0142 FRb

FIGURE 7 – POWER ON ALARMS – LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST FAULT

Page 180: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 20/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Hardware related alarms

Hardware alarms

SR11x test fault

see figure 9

Major alarm

Operating terminal

block present

AL1xx power supply voltage

Battery voltage

Link test

(analog version only)

MAIN POWER SUPPLY

MAJOR ALARM

MINOR ALARM

MAIN POWER SUPPLY

MAJOR ALARM

MINOR ALARM

MAIN POWER SUPPLY

MAJOR ALARM

MINOR ALARM

MTN VERR BOUCLE SYNC AL DIST ETAT BAT

see figure 10

see figure 12

see figure 11

see figure 13

D0143FRd

FIGURE 8 – HARDWARE STATUS

Page 181: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/40

SRxxx module test fault

Record the number of

the faulty board

Read the version of the SRxxx

programmable logic

Board no. ?

EPLD SRxxx(1) =ZZ341x-yy

(X: version and yy: revision)

Firmware version

correct ?

Version firmware correcte ?

Change board

SRxxx no.1 (high)

EPLD of SRxxx no.1

not programmed

EPLD SRxxx(2) =ZZ341x-yy

(X: version and yy: revision)

Change board

SRxxx no.2 (low)

EPLD of SRxxx no.2

not programmed

No No

Yes Yes

Board no.1: high position

Board no.2: low position

(4 commands and 8 commands option)

Read / Local / Version

Firmware version

correct ?

D0144 FRc

No.1 No.2

FIGURE 9 – HARDWARE STATUS - SRXXX MODULE TEST FAULT

Page 182: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 22/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Terminal block

presence fault

Are terminal blocks

P10 to P13 present

at the back ?

Are the presence

‘bridges’ fitted onto

terminal blocks

P10 to P13 ?

Fault of one of the modules

Change the faulty module

Connect terminal blocks

P10 to P13

See User Manual

Install the presence ‘bridges’ on

connectors P10 to P13

Fault of the UT148 and/ or SRxxx

and or FB mother boards

No

No

Yes

Yes

D0145 FRc

FIGURE 10 – HARDWARE STATUS - TERMINAL BLOCK PRESENCE FAULT

Page 183: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/40

AL13x / AL14x power supply fault

Record the number of

the faulty board

Is the supply

indicator of the faulty

board lit ?

Is the faulty board

powered on

(ON/OFF switch) ?

Check the fuse

Fuse OK ?

Change the faulty AL13x /

AL14x module

Only in case of redundant power supplies: one of

the two AL13x / AL14x modules does not work

Board no.1: left

Board no.2: right

Change the faulty

AL13x / AL14x module

Power on the board

Change the fuse on

the faulty board

Faulty AL13x / AL14x module

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

No

D0146FRc

FIGURE 11 – HARDWARE STATUS - AL13X OE AL14X SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAULT

Battery voltage fault

Change the UT148 board Power cap battery faulty

D0147 FRb

FIGURE 12 – HARDWARE STATUS - TIME-STAMP BATTERY VOLTAGE FAULT

Page 184: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 24/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Link test fault

Fault on the IR183/UT148

boards of the local or remote DIP

Change the IR183 board on the

local DIP and restart the link test

Fault cleared ?

Change the UT148 board on the

local DIP and restart the link test

Fault cleared ?

Change the UT148 and/or

IR183 board on the remote DIP

Problem with the transmission

medium or threshold not

adapted to the flow

Check the transmission

medium

END

END

OR

D0148 FRb

FIGURE 13 – HARDWARE STATUS - LINK TEST ALARM

NOTE: Before performing the diagnostic, use the HMI to reset the local

equipment, then read the alarms again.

Page 185: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/40

Alarms on communication – DIP Digital

Minor/major alarm programmable by HMI

Communication alarms

(digital version)

Bit error rate alarm

Synch loss alarm

Major or minor

remote alarm

Communication

interface alarm

Transmission

time alarm

Tx command time alarm

See figure 15

See figure 16

See figure 17

See figure 18

See figure 19

See figure 20

D0149 FRd

MAIN POWER

MAJOR ALARM

AUX.POWER

MINOR ALARM

Maintenance

LCK LOOP SYNC STATUS BAT.MTN

LinkLoc . Dist.

REM AL.

FIGURE 14 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION

Page 186: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 26/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Bit error rate / MAJOR AL. Bit error rate / MINOR AL.

Problem in the transmission

medium or connection

Check quality of

the transmission medium

Check the connections

between the DIP and the ETCD

D0150 FRa

FIGURE 15 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – BIT ERROR RATE

Page 187: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/40

Loss of synch

Check that the configuration of

the two link devices is compliant,

as well as the link

Number of

commands OK ?

Number of boards

OK ?

Logical address OK ?

Clock config. OK ?

Fault on IRxxx or UT148

Change the IRxxx module

Fault cleared ?

Change the UT148 module

Change the configuration

END END

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

Master / slave OK ?

Yes

No

D0151 FRb

FIGURE 16 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – SYNCH LOSS

Page 188: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 28/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Major remote alarm Minor remote alarm

Record the nature of the

fault on the remote unit

Repair the remote unit

Menu: <Read>

<Remote>

<Instant alarms>

ENDD0152 FRa

FIGURE 17 – REMOTE ALARMS

Communication interface alarm

No reception signal ?

Lack of rhythm ?

UT148 board or IRxx board fault

Change the UT148 board

and IRxx board

Check the ETCD signal

Lack of rhythm, only with V11

interface and G703.1

codirectional interface

Breach of HDB3 code,

with G703.6 interface

(2 Mbps)

Check the ETCD

clock signal

Yes

Yes

No

No

D0153 FRa

FIGURE 18 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE

Page 189: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/40

Transmission time alarm

Increase the detection

threshold of the

transmission time alarm

Problem with the transmission

medium or threshold

not adapted to the flow

Check the transmission

mediumOR

D0154FRa

FIGURE 19 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – TRANSMISSION TIME

Tx command time alarm fault

At least 1

input active ?

Voltage on at

least 1 input ?

Local reading of the Input /

Output condition

Check the input wiring

Change the SRxxx module

for the active input

Change the UT148 moduleNo

No

Yes

Yes

D0155FRc

FIGURE 20 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – TX COMMAND TIME

NOTE: Before performing the diagnostic, use the HMI to reset the local

equipment, then read the alarms again.

Page 190: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 30/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Alarms on communication – DIP Analog

Communication alarms(analog version)

No guard or

low level alarm

External alarm

Tx command time alarm

See figure 22

Major/minor alarm

programmable by HMI

Noise alarm (DT)

Locking alarm (DT)

Minor alarm

See figure 23

See figure 24

See figure 22

See figure 22

Minor alarm

Major/minor alarm

programmable by HMI

D0156FRd

SUPPLY 1

MAJOR ALARM

SUPPLY 2

MINOR ALARM

Maintenance

Verr B.L SYNC AL. STATUT BAT.Maint

Lien

B.D/T

SUPPLY 1

MAJOR ALARM

SUPPLY 2

MINOR ALARM

SUPPLY 1

MAJOR ALARM

SUPPLY 2

MINOR ALARM

SUPPLY 1

MAJOR ALARM

SUPPLY 2

MINOR ALARM

FIGURE 21 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION

Page 191: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/40

No guard or low level alarm

Check that the configuration

of both link units is compliant,

as the link

Number of

commands OK ?

Number of boards

OK ?

No

No

Yes

Fault on IR183 or

UT148

Change the IR183 module

Change the UT148 module

Fault cleared ?

Noise alarm (DT) Locking alarm (DT)

Change the configuration

Yes

No

End EndD0157FRc

Yes

FIGURE 22 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION – NO GUARD / LOW LEVEL / NOISE - BLOCKING

Page 192: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 32/40 e-terragridcom DIP

External alarm

Check the EN (A/B)

input on the line communication port

Fault cleared ?

Change the IR183 module

Fault cleared ?

Change the UT148 module

END

ENDYes

Yes

No

No

D0158 FRa

FIGURE 23 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION – EXTERNAL ALARM

Page 193: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/40

5.4 Warning and error messages

These messages are displayed to notify the user in case of error and risk of untimely commands, or supply instructions allowing to resolve a fault.

Miscellaneous messages

or warnings

Teleprotection not ready

(local or remote)

Checksum error

Too many

transmission errors

PC disconnected

Transmission timeout

Database checksum

fault

The DIP is processing

a higher priority even

(e.g. command restitution)

An error occurred during

communication over the V24 link

Repeat the operation.

Fault in the V24 dialogue box.

Restart the HMI or reset

teleprotection manually.

The PC < - - > Teleprotection

connecting conductor has been

disconnected or damaged.

The unit has not responded within

the time set. Establish

a new connection.

An error occurred during

data transfer. Repeat the operation.

Cont’d

D0159 FRa

FIGURE 24 – MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES

Page 194: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 34/40 e-terragridcom DIP

Miscellaneous messages

or warnings (cont’d)

The command will be

transmitted online.

Switch the local unit to

the ‘Line locking’mode

The local commands

are activated.

Switch the local unit to

the ‘Relay locking’ mode

The local commands

are activated

The action started may

generate an untimely

command on the remote unit.

OR

OR

Switch the remote unit

in the ‘Relay locking’

mode

Disconnect the

output connectors

from the local unit.

Risk associated to

remote unit loopback

The action started may

generate an untimely

command on the local unit.

Disconnect the remote

unit output connectors.

ENDD0160 FRa

FIGURE 25 – MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES (CONT’D)

Page 195: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/40

6. CLASSIFICATION OF FAULTS

Faults are distributed into two classes: major and minor

Major faults

A major fault is a fault whose appearance inhibits the normal operation of the equipment or causes a risk for operation. In all cases, it results in the command restitution relays being set to idle. The relays are held in this status until the fault disappears.

Minor faults

A minor fault is a fault whose appearance does not cause risks for operation. In this case, normal operation of the equipment is ensured.

Faults are distributed into two types: reversible and irreversible

Reversible faults

Reversible faults indicate an abnormal operating condition at a given time. Teleprotection returns to a normal operating mode once the fault disappears.

Irreversible faults

Irreversible faults indicate permanent non operation of the link or equipment. Manual intervention (including powering back on or resetting) is required.

Faults are distributed into 3 categories: power on / hardware / communication

Page 196: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 36/40 e-terragridcom DIP

The following table summarizes the faults classified per category with information related to the class and type of fault:

FAULTS CLASS TYPE VERSION**

‘Power on’ faults

Time stamp RAM test MAJ IRREV

DSP RAM test MAJ IRREV

Flash EPROM test MAJ IRREV

Communication interface present MAJ IRREV

Loopback test MAJ IRREV

Configuration checksum MAJ IRREV

SRxxx coherence test MAJ IRREV

IRIG-B coherence test MAJ IRREV

IR183 coherence test MAJ IRREV A

‘Hardware’ faults

Presence of SRxxx modules MAJ REV

AL1XX fault MIN REV

Presence of operating terminal blocks MIN REV

Battery fault (time stamp) MIN IRREV

I/O test MAJ IRREV

UT power supply voltage test MAJ REV

Link test MAJ IRREV A

‘Communication’ faults

Transmission time alarm MIN/MAJ* REV D

No signal received MAJ REV D

No Rx pace MAJ REV D

No Tx pace MAJ REV D

Loss of synchronization MAJ REV D

Bit error rate / MAJ ALARM MAJ REV D

Bit error rate / MIN ALARM MIN REV D

Remote major alarm MAJ REV D

Remote minor alarm MIN REV D

Extended Tx command alarm MIN/MAJ* REV

No guard MAJ REV A

Low level MAJ REV A

Blocking MAJ REV Dual tone***

Noise MAJ REV Dual tone

External alarm MIN/MAJ* REV A

* configuration with HMI

** In the Version column, the letter D indicates that the fault concerns only the digital version of the DIP. The letter A indicates the fault concerns only the analog version. The lack of letter in this column means that the fault concerns both versions.

Faults of the remote equipment are reported locally. They are considered as reversible regardless of their nature. Resolving the remote fault results in the local alarm disappearing.

Page 197: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/40

7. UPDATE OF THE DIP FIRMWARE

Software updates always come with a risk. In case of blocking, the UT148 board must be returned to the factory to reset the memories.

7.1 Overview

The update procedure includes four steps:

• Prior conditions.

• Installing files on the PC.

• Transferring update files.

During this step, the files are written in flash memory UT148 (a file is copied in 30 seconds).

• Connecting the DIP.

7.2 Prior conditions

During the update procedure, the equipment must be disconnected to prevent any untimely command.

Before applying the update procedure:

• Power off the DIP unit.

• Disconnect the I/O connectors P11 to P13.

• Disconnect connector P18 providing access to the transmission line.

• Disconnect the optical connector of the IR 182 module if connected.

• Power on the DIP unit.

7.3 Installing files on the PC

The update is supplied on a compressed file containing 2 files: Diptsoft.dat and Lisezmoi.txt.

• Create a temporary directory on the PC HD (e.g. C:\diptemp).

• Copy the update zip file into the directory created.

• Use Winzip to extract the dipsoft.dat and lisezmoi.txt files into the directory created.

• Open the lisezmoi.txt file using a text editor.

Page 198: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 38/40 e-terragridcom DIP

• Copy the update password for later use:

• Copy the dipsoft.dat file into the installation directory of the HMI application on the PC (by default: C:\ Program Files \ ALSTOM \ IHM DIP\). If another dipsoft.dat file is already present, a message asks whether you wish to replace it, answer YES.

7.4 Transferring update files

Once the update procedure launched, do not interrupt it by resetting, nor powering off the DIP nor disconnecting the serial link. If this rule is not applied, the unit may be damaged, requiring a return to the factory.

1. Check the step on prior conditions (disconnect the DIP).

2. Power on the DIP unit.

3. Connect the RS 232 serial communication cable between the PC and the DIP.

4. Start the HMI application.

5. Connect the HMI from the DIP Tools \ connect:

6. Select the menu Tools \ Password.

7. Enter the 15-character password copied in the lisezmoi.txt file (the password can be copied/pasted from this file):

Page 199: DIP User Manual

Maintenance

DIP/EN MT/A23

e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/40

8. Click the button. The following window opens:

This window indicates the current DSP and EPLD version, as well as the versions to download.

9. Click the button.

10. Notification messages appear with information on the file transfer:

When all files have been transferred successfully, the DIP is reset.

11. Reset the list of events and alarms upon the update from the previous digital version to the ZZ339A-05 version or the analog version ZZ350A-03.

12. Check that the DIP version complies with the update version by selecting the menu Read\local\version.

13. Remove the C:\ diptemp directory, then the dipsoft.dat file from the HMI directory.

Note: In case of communication problem between the PC HMI and the DIP, a message indicating a transmission problem and a prompt to restart the procedure may appear: Continue the update file transfer procedure from step 4.

Page 200: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN MT/A23

Maintenance

Page 40/40 e-terragridcom DIP

14. At the end of the procedure, the DIP unit resets automatically, and the following message may be displayed. Ignore it.

7.5 Connecting the DIP

1. Power off the DIP unit.

2. Connect the connectors.

3. Power on the DIP unit.

4. Reset the lists of events, alarms and counters.

5. Log onto the DIP with the HMI matching the new version.

Page 201: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP

HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

PART 1: DIP - ANALOG SINGLE TONE

Page 202: DIP User Manual
Page 203: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/68

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 8

2.1 Information presentation 8

2.2 Example in a paragraph 8

3. OVERVIEW 9

3.1 Foreword 9

3.2 System Required 9

3.3 Installing the HMI 9

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS 10

4.1 User level structure 10

4.2 Menus 11

5. DIP PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 12

5.1 Rules for Password Creation 12

5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu 12

5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu 13

5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu 14

5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> 14

5.6 Exiting the Password Manager 14

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 15

6.1 Main screen 15

6.2 Header bar 15

6.3 Menu bar 16

6.4 Toolbar 16

6.5 Status bars 16

6.6 Work and dialog zone 17

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION 18

7.1 <Tools> Menu 18

7.2 <File> Menu 18

7.3 <DIP> Menu 19

7.4 <History> Menu 19

7.5 <Test> Menu 19

8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP – SINGLE TONE 20

8.1 Launching the HMI 20

8.2 Logging into the DIP 20

8.3 <Tools> Menu 21

Page 204: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 2/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.3.1 Entering a password 21

8.3.2 Returning to level 0 21

8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI 22

8.3.4 Exit the HMI. 22

8.4 <File> Menu 23

8.5 Creating a configuration File>New> 23

8.5.1 Description of the configuration window 24

8.5.2 Configuration window toolbar 25

8.6 Configuring General Parameters 25

8.6.1 Configuring the number of commands 26

8.6.2 Configuring the version 26

8.6.3 Configuring IRIG-B 27

8.6.4 Configuring HMI speed 27

8.6.5 Configuring Logical Address 27

8.6.6 Entering comments 27

8.6.7 Configuring the link test 28

8.6.8 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment 28

8.7 Configuring Sender Parameters 29

8.7.1 Configuring the Guard source 29

8.7.2 Configuring the sender band used 30

8.7.3 Configuring sender transmission levels 30

8.7.4 Configuring Command transmission parameters 31

8.7.5 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure 33

8.7.6 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment 34

8.8 Configuring Receiver Parameters 35

8.8.1 Configuring LF band 35

8.8.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level 36

8.8.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Scheme 36

8.8.4 Configuring the status of the output relay upon the alarm 37

8.8.5 Receiver holding delay configuration 37

8.8.6 Configuring unblocking parameters 38

8.8.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration 38

8.9 Configuring Input/output Parameters 39

8.9.1 Configuring the I/O board 39

8.9.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay 40

8.9.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs 40

8.9.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration 41

8.10 Configuring alarm parameters 42

Page 205: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/68

8.10.1 Configuring Alarm on External Input 42

8.10.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm 43

8.10.3 Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm 43

8.10.4 Configuring the Alarm outputs delay parameter 44

8.10.5 Sending the alarms configuration 44

8.11 <Configuration> File Menu 45

8.11.1 Editing a configuration file 45

8.11.2 Saving a configuration file 46

8.11.3 Sending a configuration file 46

8.11.4 Closing a configuration file 46

8.12 <DIP> Menu 46

8.12.1 Reading the configuration 47

8.12.2 Reading the hardware configuration 48

8.12.3 Reading the versions 48

8.12.4 Instant alarm reading 49

8.12.5 Read input / output statuses 49

8.13 DIP>Maintenance menu 50

8.13.1 Switching from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode and vice-versa 51

8.13.2 Maintenance status bar 52

8.13.3 Reading the input levels measurement 52

8.13.4 Configuring the output levels setting 53

8.13.5 Configuring the reception level 53

8.13.6 Maintenance - Forcing 55

8.14 Date setup 60

8.15 Resetting the DIP 61

8.16 <History> Menu 61

8.16.1 Events reading 62

8.16.2 Alarms reading 63

8.16.3 Reading the local command counters 64

8.16.4 Deleting events 64

8.16.5 Deleting alarms 65

8.17 <Test> Menu 66

8.18 <Factory> Menu 66

8.19 <Help> Menu 66

Page 206: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 4/68 e-terragridcom DIP

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION 15

FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR 16

FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR 16

FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR 16

FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY 17

FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU 21

FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW 24

FIGURE 9 – TOOLBAR 25

FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW 25

FIGURE 11 – CONFIGURATION – GENERAL TAB PAGE 26

FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION – SENDER TAB PAGE 29

FIGURE 13 – CONFIGURATION – RECEIVER TAB PAGE 35

FIGURE 14 – CONFIGURATION - INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE 39

FIGURE 15 – CONFIGURATION – ALARMS TAB PAGE 42

FIGURE 16 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU 45

FIGURE 17 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 48

FIGURE 18 – VERSION WINDOW 48

FIGURE 19 – INSTANT ALARMS WINDOW 49

FIGURE 20 – INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW 49

FIGURE 21 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS 51

FIGURE 22 – MAINTENANCE MENU 51

FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR 52

FIGURE 24 – MAINTENANCE - FORCING 55

FIGURE 25 – EXAMPLE OF READ EVENTS LIST 62

FIGURE 26 – EXAMPLE OF READ ALARMS LIST 63

FIGURE 27 – EXAMPLE OF READ OF COUNTER STATUS 64

Page 207: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/68

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS

A 04/01/2001 Original issue

B 23/08/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version

C 12/07/2006 New features and additional technical explanations

D 14/11/2007 New chapter. Task oriented writing. HMI chapter separated in three sections: digital, single tone analog and double tone analog.

E 11/02/2008 Minor corrections

A22 20/02/2009 Minor corrections

B22 01/06/2010 Minor corrections

A23 13/01/2011 New version 2.3

Page 208: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 6/68 e-terragridcom DIP

GENERAL

This manual describes the Human-Machine interface of the DIP, i.e. the software application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this unit.

DEFINITIONS

HMI Tool for using the DIP (Human-Machine Interface).

Configuration All the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters (customization components) of a teleprotection.

Configuration File Micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a teleprotection.

Input password Password for accessing the ‘Password Manager’ utility.

User level All the authorized operations corresponding to the level of responsibility of a given operator.

Level password Password for accessing a user level.

NOTE: Windows and PC are registered trademarks.

Page 209: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/68

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.

(1) As per the option chosen

Page 210: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 8/68 e-terragridcom DIP

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

• The firmware or software version numbers which may appear in illustrations in this manual may not reflect the latest implemented in the unit; the information is nonetheless current.

2.1 Information presentation

• Menu Path are indicated: Menu_level_entry1 >Menu_level_entry2>.

Example: select File >New.

• In the text Menu names are between <> example: Example: <DIP> menu.

• In the text window names are between <>. Example: <Entry>.

• A screen shot shows a button. Example: represents the OK button.

2.2 Example in a paragraph

<HISTORY> MENU NAME BETWEEN <>

To clear events:

Select History>Clear>Clear events

A <Confirmation> window opens:

Answer

Page 211: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/68

3. OVERVIEW

3.1 Foreword

As it is powerful and easy to use, the DIP Analog teleprotection HMI enables local:

• complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other tools,

• level adjustment without measuring apparatus,

• filing of configurations (=>rationalization of commissioning actions),

• time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics),

• interactive and user-friendly maintenance,

• printing of unit parameters.

3.2 System Required

The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating under Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows XP Service Pack 2. The PC must feature at minimum:

• 40 MB free space on the HD,

• 256 MB RAM.

IMPORTANT: HAVING SEVERAL TASKS RUNNING CONCURRENTLY (DESKTOP OR OTHER TOOLS) MAY CAUSE PC-HMI TRANSMISSION FAULTS. THEREFORE, ALL OTHER APPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI.

When the PC has no serial port, use a PCMCIA converter. Experience shows that USB converters offer lesser compatibility.

3.3 Installing the HMI

Installation:

• Insert the CD-ROM supplied in the drive.

• Run the setup.exe file from the <Run> menu in the Program manager: D\:setup.

• Follow the instructions.

Page 212: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 10/68 e-terragridcom DIP

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS

4.1 User level structure

The DIP places operations in hierarchical command: some actions have no impact on unit operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific responsibility on the part of the operator.

The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2.

Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the command menus are displayed according to user level.

Page 213: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/68

4.2 Menus

Level

Menus 0 2

File new x x

open x x

Tools Identification x x

Returning to level 0 x x

connect x x

disconnect x x

exit x x

DIP * configuration x x

hardware configuration x x

version x x

alarms snapshot x x

input/output x x

reset x

DIP / Date * read x x

write x

DIP / Maintenance * input level measure x x

output levels setting, adjustment receiving alignment and automatic alignment

x

switch to maintenance mode x

unlocking line (security) x

unlocking relay (security) x

local loop back x

transmitter forcing x

commands output forcing x

alarms forcing x

Test * link test x

History * event list x x

alarm list x x

counter list x x

clear event file x

clear alarm file x

Help x x

TABLE 1 – MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL

* To access these menus, you need to be connected.

Page 214: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 12/68 e-terragridcom DIP

5. DIP PASSWORD MANAGEMENT

The DIP Security Password Manager application, associated to the HMI application, is used to create, modify, read and delete the passwords.

To launch the application, click the desktop icon “DIP Security” icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it.

For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.

5.1 Rules for Password Creation

Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from the following:

• upper case (A to Z)

• lower case (a to z)

• numbers (0 to 9)

• ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ¨ | ~

5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu

The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus: <Create> and < List passwords >.

To access the Password Manager menus:

1. Launch the DIP Security application by clicking the desktop icon. The <DIP password management > window opens:

2. Select Password > Input, the < Password Input> window opens:

3. Enter "DIP5000" upper case without the quotes in both windows (only upon first login).

Note: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended upon the first use (see the next paragraph).

Page 215: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/68

4. Click the button.

The following window opens:

The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available.

5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu

The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password.

Upon first use, use the DIP password (upper case). We recommend to then modify this password.

1. Access the Manager menu (see § 5.2)

2. Select Password > Modify. The following window opens:

3. Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see § 5.1).

Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled.

1. Click the button. The following window opens:

2. Confirm the new password by re-entering it.

Page 216: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 14/68 e-terragridcom DIP

5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu

Several passwords may be created.

1. To create user passwords, select < Create password >.

The <Create password > window below opens:

2. Enter the new password in the < Input password > window, in compliance with the rules

for Password Creation (see § 5.1). Enter the password again in the field ‘Confirm password’.

3. Click the button.

4. If required, you may enter other passwords to be defined in the <Enter password> window.

5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords>

To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> in the Password Manager

The list of passwords is displayed.

1. To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the button. A confirmation message is then displayed, Answer yes.

5.6 Exiting the Password Manager

To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select Password>Exit.

Page 217: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/68

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION

The HMI has an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes.

As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, it is recommended that operators not familiar with WINDOWS refer to the user manual for this environment.

6.1 Main screen

The main screen is composed of functional zones (see the following figures)

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION

6.2 Header bar

The header bar displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.

Page 218: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 16/68 e-terragridcom DIP

6.3 Menu bar

The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS menus, displayed according to the current user level (password dependent).

FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR

6.4 Toolbar

The operator can launch commands and read information locally via the toolbar shortcuts

Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.

FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR

6.5 Status bars

Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear displaying the following information.

The bottom bar displays:

• the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon)

• the link address

• the transmission speed of serial port (HMI connection)

• the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance)

• any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have triggered this alarm)

• the user level granted (from 0 to 2 depending on the password)

• a green led indicating the connection status (OK when flashing)

• the DSP firmware version

FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR

Page 219: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/68

6.6 Work and dialog zone

Most commands are also issued using dialogue boxes (see figure 6 below). Six standard Windows tools are used:

• optional button groups

• tick boxes

• command buttons

• text boxes

• lists

• scroll bars

FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY

Page 220: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 18/68 e-terragridcom DIP

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION

7.1 <Tools> Menu

Identification: this menu is used to open a window to enter the password and access the corresponding user level. Access to the upper level is protected by password.

Back to level 0: this menu allows to return to level 0, the lowest level of privilege.

Disconnect: this menu disconnects the HMI from the DIP.

Exit: this menu closes the DIP HMI application.

7.2 <File> Menu

New: Creates a configuration file from a default configuration in a DIP version (Single tone or Dual tone). When selected a pop-up window opens asking you to choose DIP version (Single tone or Dual tone)

Open: Selecting this menu allows the following to be opened:

• Events files (*.events),

• Alarm files (*.alarms),

• Counters files (*.cnter),

• Config files: Configuration Files.

Page 221: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/68

7.3 <DIP> Menu

This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local unit:

• Configuration: Read and modify all configuration parameters,

• Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters,

• Maintenance: Used to launch measures, adjust levels and for forcing.

• Alarms preview: provides a view of the current alarm status,

• Inputs / Outputs: read input and output status.

• Versions: read firmware versions.

• Date Setup: read and write the date and time on the unit.

• Reset: performs hardware and software resets on the unit.

7.4 <History> Menu

• Events: read and display event list.

• Alarms: read and display alarms list.

• Counters: display the status of input/output commands counters. Counter Information can be saved and printed.

• Erase: via two sub menus <Erase Events> and <Erase Alarms>, allows event and alarm logs to be deleted from the unit.

7.5 <Test> Menu

This menu enables you to perform a link test on the equipment.

Page 222: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 20/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP – SINGLE TONE

8.1 Launching the HMI

To launch the HMI, click:

Start>Programs>HMIDIP5K>HMIDIP5K>

or by clicking the Desktop HMIDIP5K shortcut.

Launching the DIP HMI allows to:

• log into a DIP

• create a configuration

• modify an existing configuration saved in the PC.

8.2 Logging into the DIP

To log in, click the Connect icon or open the <Tools> menu:

and select <Local connect> to open the <Login> window.

You can choose among the ports found automatically by the HMI or the favorites defined beforehand. To create a new favorite, right-click the location where you wish to place the favorite.

Page 223: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/68

8.3 <Tools> Menu

Once logged in, the <Tools> menu is used to:

• grant a level to a user according to a password,

• reset the user level to 0,

• disconnect the HMI from the DIP,

• exit the HMI.

FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU

8.3.1 Entering a password

When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0.

To access the higher level 2, the user must enter a password. For more details about user level and password management see § 4. and § 5.

To enter a password:

1. Select Tools>Identification. The following window opens:

2. Enter the password. If the DIP has a password, only this password allows to raise the

HMI to user level 2.

3. Check the level granted (according to the password) in the status bar.

8.3.2 Returning to level 0

The user may return to level 0 at any time.

To set the user level to 0:

1. Select Tools>Return to level 0.

2. Check the user level in the bottom bar.

The DIP can, optionally, have an embedded password.

Page 224: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 22/68 e-terragridcom DIP

If you are already a level 2 user, the menu is:

You can also change the embedded password by using this menu option. Please note that if you forget the embedded password, it may be reset only by returning the motherboard (UT148) to the plant.

8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI

1. Select Tools>Disconnect

2. The HMI is disconnected, the <DIP>, <History> menu disappears. The following icons in the upper bar are grayed out and inaccessible:

Information is no longer displayed in the bottom status bar (only is visible).

8.3.4 Exit the HMI.

To exit the HMI:

Select Tools>Exit.

A confirmation messages appears.

Answer .

The HMI closes.

Page 225: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/68

8.4 <File> Menu

The <File> menu provides access to the configuration files.

This menu allows a new configuration to be created or a saved configuration file to be opened.

4 types of file can be opened:

• *.rtf -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see Figure 10 for the window display).

• *.alarms -> alarm list file for consultation (see figure 27 for the window display)

• *.events -> event list file for consultation (see figure 26 for the window display)

• *.cnter -> counter statement for consultation ( see figure 28 for the window display)

The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a configuration file:

• Select File>New or File>Open,

• Select the DIP Single Tone version in the <Version selection> window after clicking File>New.

• Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration,

• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).

Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations.

The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration:

• Select DIP>Configuration.

• Modify the displayed configuration.

• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).

8.5 Creating a configuration File>New>

This menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration. This configuration can be modified, saved for later use (even at level 0), or sent to the unit (level2).

1. Selecting the File>New menu opens the <Version selection> asking for the DIP version.

2. Select Single tone in the scroll-down window and click OK.

Page 226: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 24/68 e-terragridcom DIP

Once the DIP version selected, a default configuration window opens.

FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW

8.5.1 Description of the configuration window

The configuration parameters are divided in 5 tabs:

• General

• Sender

• Receiver

• Input/Output

• Alarms

This configuration window is used access to the following parameters:

• Number of commands

• Version (Normal / Enhanced)

• Comments

• HMI Speed

• Link test

• Logical address

• IRIG-B State

• Sender parameters

• Receiver parameters

• Input/Output parameters

• Alarms

Page 227: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/68

8.5.2 Configuration window toolbar

FIGURE 9 – TOOLBAR

Clicking the button opens a Synthesis Window displaying the DIP Configuration parameters in text format:

FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW

8.6 Configuring General Parameters

To configure the general parameters:

Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).

Page 228: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 26/68 e-terragridcom DIP

FIGURE 11 – CONFIGURATION – GENERAL TAB PAGE

8.6.1 Configuring the number of commands

Select the value matching the configuration by checking the corresponding button.

8.6.2 Configuring the version

Select the version:

• Normal: power available for a signal command cannot be modified in this mode, as it depends on the number of commands. The total power available is distributed evenly among the number of commands.

• Enhanced: the power available for a signal command is adjusted automatically, according to the number of commands to be sent at a given time, and power authorized on the medium. Indeed, all the power available for an command is allocated according to variable conditions.

Page 229: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/68

8.6.3 Configuring IRIG-B

In case of IRIG-B module presence, check On.

Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector.

Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronization signal every 30 seconds).

8.6.4 Configuring HMI speed

Select the 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps value by checking the corresponding button.

8.6.5 Configuring Logical Address

Range value 0 to 255.

8.6.6 Entering comments

Enter the Source Station, the Destination Station, and your comments in compliance with the following rules:

• Source and destination stations: 20 characters maximum.

• Comments: 70 characters maximum.

Page 230: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 28/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.6.7 Configuring the link test

The Link Test feature is used to automatically and periodically check the transmission medium between the sender and the receiver, by sending a message in a loop.

To schedule transmission test:

Select the test periodicity by checking the corresponding button:

• Daily: in this case enter the hour and minutes using the scroll-down window.

• Hourly: in this case enter the minutes using the scroll-down window.

8.6.8 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment

When you have completed General Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button. The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the condition of the LEDs after reset. Please note that after each configuration transfer to the DIP, the user is returned to password level 0. a password is then required to return to level 2.

Page 231: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/68

8.7 Configuring Sender Parameters

To configure the Sender parameters:

Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).

Click the Sender Tab. The following window opens:

FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION – SENDER TAB PAGE

8.7.1 Configuring the Guard source

Select the Guard source:

• Internal: the source is the DIP equipment.

• External: the source comes from an external unit (PLC or other).

Note: The Useful LF Band Guard parameter depends on the Guard Source parameter. Therefore, the Guard Source parameter must be configured first.

Page 232: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 30/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.7.2 Configuring the sender band used

The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity.

Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window.

Possible values are:

• 300 - 2000

• 300 - 2400

• 300 - 3400

Select the Guard parameter in the appropriate scrolling menu.

The Guard parameter depends on the <Bandwidth> parameter:

• 3680 for the 300-3400 bandwidth

• 2600 for the 300-2400 bandwidth

• 2400 or 3680 for the 300-2000 bandwidth

8.7.3 Configuring sender transmission levels

The Transmission level corresponds to the signal power allocated to a Frequency and to the Guard.

The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.

To configure Transmission levels For Guard and Frequency 1 to 4:

Select, using the scrolling button, the Transmission level in compliance with the following rule:

The difference between sending frequency transmission levels must not exceed 16 dBm. If this rule is not applied, a warning message appears when attempting to save the configuration file.

If this warning message appears, modify the transmission levels in consequence.

Page 233: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/68

8.7.4 Configuring Command transmission parameters

The transmission of an input command requires the following parameters to be configured:

• Holding Delay

• Mode pulsed or not

• Input Holding delay validation

• Protection scheme

8.7.4.1 Receiver holding delay configuration

Holding delay Parameter description

The Holding Delay parameter corresponds to the minimum transmission time of a validated command. However, if the corresponding pulsed mode box is checked, this time is a maximum, as shown above.

The transmission time is the maximum value between the Holding Delay and the input signal command duration.

Example:

Holding delay: 100 ms.

A first input signal command duration is 5ms.

Holding delay 100 ms > Command duration 5 ms: The command will be transmitted during 100 ms.

A second input command duration is 120 ms.

Input signal command duration 120 ms > Holding delay 100 ms: The command will be transmitted during 120 ms.

Parameter Values

Parameter values are in ms.

Range value 0 to 500 ms.

Procedure

For each command, select the Holding Delay by positioning the scrolling button.

Page 234: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 32/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.7.4.2 Configuring Sender Input Valid delay

Input Valid Delay Parameter description

At the receipt end the restitution of a command requires a processing time that varies according to the chosen protection scheme. To be rebuilt an input command must be transmitted during a time at least equal to the processing time.

The Input Holding Valid Delay corresponds to a threshold applied to an input signal command duration conditioning the activation of the Input Holding Delay.

• Input signal commands whose duration is inferior to the Input Holding Valid Delay are validated and transmitted without any prolongation.

Restitution at the receipt end of input commands sent in such condition is not guaranteed because the transmission time may be less than the processing time required by the Protection Scheme.

• Input signal commands whose duration is greater than the Holding Valid Delay, are validated and transmitted for a minimum duration corresponding to the Holding Delay parameter.

When the Holding Delay parameter is greater than the processing reception duration, reception of input command sent in such condition is guaranteed to be lossless.

Parameter Values

Parameter values are in ms.

Range value 0 to 5 ms.

Example

E.g. holding delay 50ms, input validation delay 5ms:

1. Input signal command 3ms, duration less than the Holding Delay: the Holding delay is not considered, the command is sent without prolongation.

2. Input command 6ms, command acquisition duration less than the Holding Delay validation. The Holding delay is taken into account and the command is transmitted for the Holding Delay: 50 ms.

3. Input command 60 ms: command acquisition duration more than the Holding Delay validation parameter. Input command more than the Holding Delay. The command is transmitted during 60 ms.

Procedure

For each command, select the Holding Delay validation by positioning the scrolling button.

Page 235: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/68

8.7.4.2.1 Configuring Sender Protection Schemes

Parameter Description

3 protection schemes are available: stage acceleration, locking and direct trigger.

Permissive tripping commands are always monitored by a protection relay. The circuit breaker is tripped when receipt of the command coincides with operation of the protection relay at the receiving end responding to a system fault. The intention of these schemes is to speed up tripping for faults occurring within the protected zone.

Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element that detects faults external to the protected zone. Detection of an external fault at the local end of a protected circuit results in a blocking signal being transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, receipt of the blocking signal prevents the remote end protection operating if it had detected the external fault. The risk of a spurious trip is higher.

Direct tripping: remote triggering signals sent directly to the main trigger relay. Reception of the command triggers trips the circuit breaker. The method of communication must be reliable and secure because any signal detected at the receiving end will cause a trip of the circuit at that end.

Procedure

For each command select the protection scheme by selecting the value with the scroll down window.

8.7.5 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure

Depending on user needs and of the characteristics of input signals applied to the DIP, notably their duration, two procedures are available.

8.7.5.1 Procedure without Input Valid Delay

For each command

1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme.

Option:

2. Using the scroll-down window select a Holding Delay.

3. Click the button.

4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.

Page 236: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 34/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.7.5.2 Procedure without Input Valid Delay

For each command

1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme.

2. Select the valid input delay by positioning the scrolling button.

3. Click the button.

Note: The Holding Delay parameter is automatically set to a minimum value compatible with the application scheme.

4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.

Holding delay, Holding delay validation, and protection schemes parameters are dependent.

If the procedure indicated is not applied (e.g. Holding time selected before the protection schemes), incompatibilities may occur.

In case of incompatibility when selecting the protection schemes, warning messages are displayed.

More particularly, if the holding time is incompatible, a warning message is displayed:

In this case, the minimum value for holding time is adjusted automatically to a value compatible with the protection scheme.

8.7.6 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment

When you have completed Sender Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button. The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the condition of the LEDs after reset.

Page 237: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/68

8.8 Configuring Receiver Parameters

To configure the Receiver parameters:

Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).

Click the Receiver Tab. The following window opens:

FIGURE 13 – CONFIGURATION – RECEIVER TAB PAGE

8.8.1 Configuring LF band

The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity.

Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window.

Possible values are:

• 300-2000,

Page 238: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 36/68 e-terragridcom DIP

• 300-2400,

• 300-3400.

The Guard parameter depends on the bandwidth. It is defined automatically according to the Bandwidth parameter:

• 2100-2300 for the frequency 300-2000,

• 2400-2600 for the frequency 2400-2660,

• 3500-3800 for the frequency 300-3400.

8.8.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level

Guard Signal

This parameter defines the Guard Signal level.

Parameter values are in dBm.

Value Range -40 to 0 dBm.

Select the Guard Signal input level using the scrolling button.

Commands vs Guard gain

This parameter corresponds to the relative level between signal commands level and Guard Signal.

Parameter values are in dB.

Two ranges of values are possible according to the version selected: Normal or Enhanced.

0 - 6 dB for the normal version,

0 - 16 dB for the enhanced version.

Select Commands vs Guard Gain using the scrolling button.

Note: The Receiver Input level can also be set from the Maintenance window, manually or automatically (see § 8.12).

8.8.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Scheme

Parameter Description

Three protection values are possible: stage acceleration, locking and direct trigger.

For each command, select the Type using the scrolling window.

Page 239: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/68

8.8.4 Configuring the status of the output relay upon the alarm

Parameter Description

Idle: the restitution relay is set to the idle state in case of alarm.

Former state: the restitution relay contact remains open or closed, even in case of alarm. The alarm has no impact on the status of the switch.

For each command

Select the Relay state on alarm parameter using the scrolling window.

8.8.5 Receiver holding delay configuration

Range value 0 to 500 ms by 1 ms steps.

For each command

Using the scroll-down window select the value for Holding Delay.

Page 240: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 38/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.8.6 Configuring unblocking parameters

Unblocking

Only command which type is Permissive tripping can be unblocked. Each command can be unblocked, independently of the others.

For each command to unblock:

Check the appropriate box.

Unblocking threshold

Parameter values are in dB. The value range is -20 to -10 dB. Display accuracy is ± 0.1dB.

Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button.

Unblocking Delay

Parameter values are in ms. Range value 5 to 80 ms. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 ms.

Select the unblocking delay value using the scrolling button.

8.8.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration

When you have completed Receiver Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button. The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.

Page 241: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/68

8.9 Configuring Input/output Parameters

To configure Input/Output parameters:

Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).

Click the Input / Output tab. The following window opens:

FIGURE 14 – CONFIGURATION - INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE

8.9.1 Configuring the I/O board

Select the I/O Boards parameter corresponding to your hardware configuration by checking the corresponding box.

For 2 commands select 1 board.

For more than 2 commands, 1 or two boards can be selected.

Note: If two boards are selected, a Combinatorial Logic on Inputs part is displayed.

Page 242: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 40/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.9.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay

Parameter Description

The Input Filter Delay parameter is a threshold applied to the input command signal. It is used to exclude high noise-level signals which could be taken as input commands.

Signal commands with a duration less than the Input Filter Delay duration are not transmitted.

Signal commands with a duration greater than the Input Filter Delay duration are validated and transmitted. The propagation time of the command transmitted via the Input Filter Delay increases of the Input Filter Delay.

Parameter value

Range 0 to 3 ms in 1 ms steps.

Procedure

For each command to which an input filter delay is to be applied:

Select the value using the scrolling button.

8.9.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

This panel is only available having configured 4 commands/2 boards.

It is used to allocate commands with logical associations between input signals.

Page 243: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/68

For each command the possible choices are:

• IN1: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the INT2 input (P10 connector)

• IN2: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the IN2 input (P10 connector)

• IN1 or IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the OR operator applied to the input signal connected on the IN1 input (P10 connector) and the IN2 input (P10 connector)

• IN1 and IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the AND operator applied to the input signal connected to the IN1 input (P10 connector) and the IN2 input (P10 connector)

For command 2 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN3 and IN2 by IN4.

For command 3 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN5, IN2 by IN6 and P10 connector by P12 connector.

For command 4 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN7, IN2 by IN8 and P10 connector by P12 connector.

8.9.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration

When you have completed Input/Output Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button. The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.

Page 244: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 42/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.10 Configuring alarm parameters

To configure alarm parameters:

Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).

Click the Alarms tab.

FIGURE 15 – CONFIGURATION – ALARMS TAB PAGE

8.10.1 Configuring Alarm on External Input

The External alarm input comes from an external unit (PLC or other).

Page 245: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/68

The external unit and the DIP must be interconnected with a special connection cable supporting alarm wires.

Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0 to 2.5 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.

To configure Alarm on External Input:

1. Check the Alarm on external input box,

2. Check the button for level Minor or Major button.

8.10.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm

This alarm is set if the input command signal duration is more than the parameter value.

Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0.5 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.

To configure Input Command Duration Alarm:

1. Check the Input Command Duration Alarm box,

2. Select the value using the scrolling button.

3. Select the alarm level, Minor or Major.

8.10.3 Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm

This alarm occurs if the Signal level, measured through internal digital filter, is under a Threshold during a Delay.

Threshold

Defines the level under which an alarm is triggered.

Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -16 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.

Delay

Defines the low level signal delay from which an alarm is triggered.

Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 1 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.

To configure the Signal Loss Alarm parameters:

1. Select the threshold level using the scrolling button.

2. Select the delay using the scrolling button.

Page 246: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 44/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.10.4 Configuring the Alarm outputs delay parameter

Alarm outputs delay:

Closing of the contact relay can be delayed. Possible values are:

0

2.5 s

5 s

10 s

For each relay 1 and 2, a major alarm and a minor alarm are possible:

Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button.

8.10.5 Sending the alarms configuration

When you have completed the Alarms parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button. The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.

Page 247: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 45/68

8.11 <Configuration> File Menu

FIGURE 16 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU

This menu allows configuration files to be edited, saved, sent and closed.

8.11.1 Editing a configuration file

The Edit menu is used to display a synthesis Parameter values window.

To edit a configuration file in the <Configuration> window:

Select File > Edit.

Click the button. The following window opens:

Page 248: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 46/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.11.2 Saving a configuration file

Save: this menu opens a standard Windowsdialog box allowing the displayed configuration to be saved in a file.

To save a configuration file:

Select File>Save.

Give a path for the saved file and name it.

8.11.3 Sending a configuration file

Send: This menu, accessible from user level 2, is used to send the HMI displayed configuration to the unit. After receiving the configuration file, the unit resets. When the unit restarts, the sent configuration is taken into account.

A configuration window is opened in the HMI using the menus File > New > or File > Open > or DIP > Configuration >.

Once modified, the configuration file can be sent to the unit using the menu File >Send or the Send button.

To send a configuration file:

Select File > Send or click the button.

The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.

8.11.4 Closing a configuration file

Exit: This menu closes the configuration window.

To close a configuration window select File > Exit

Select File>Exit.

8.12 <DIP> Menu

Page 249: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 47/68

The <DIP> menu allows to display:

• Configuration

• Hardware configuration

• Maintenance

• Alarms snapshot

• Input/Output

• Versions

• Date Setup

The DIP menu also allows to launch the Reset command (user level 2).

8.12.1 Reading the configuration

To read the configuration parameters:

Select DIP>Configuration. A <Configuration> window opens:

When opening the <Configuration> window, the user can modify the configuration parameters (see § 8.5 and next).

Page 250: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 48/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.12.2 Reading the hardware configuration

To read the hardware configuration:

Select DIP>Hardware Config.

The <Hardware> window opens:

FIGURE 17 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW

This window shows the hardware configuration. The units installed are accessible and the appropriate box checked. Units not installed are grayed out and not legible.

8.12.3 Reading the versions

This menu allows to read the version of the EPLD and DSP firmware.

To read the version:

Select DIP>Versions.

The following window opens:

FIGURE 18 – VERSION WINDOW

Page 251: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 49/68

8.12.4 Instant alarm reading

To read the alarms statuses in Instant alarms:

Select DIP> Alarms Snapshot.

FIGURE 19 – INSTANT ALARMS WINDOW

8.12.5 Read input / output statuses

To read input / output statuses:

Select DIP>Input / Output.

The following Input / Output Statuses window opens:

FIGURE 20 – INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW

Page 252: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 50/68 e-terragridcom DIP

The Input / Output Statuses parameter represents the status of commands acquired and rendered. Two statuses are possible: Active and Inactive.

− Inactive command = Inputs in black and Outputs in blue

− Active command = Inputs and Outputs in red

Example of active command:

A signal command is active on IN1, the matching input is red.

The signal is transmitted, Tx C1 in red,

The status of the R1 command restitution is active and red.

8.13 DIP>Maintenance menu

The DIP>Maintenance menu allows performing the following operations:

• Switch to maintenance or normal mode

• Unlockingline or relay

• Local loopback

• Forcing transmission, reception or an alarm

• Reset events or alarms (local)

To access the Maintenance menus:

Select DIP>Maintenance, the following window opens:

Page 253: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 51/68

FIGURE 21 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS

Only reading of the input level is accessible when accessing level 0 of the Maintenance menu.

In this case, only the Level tab page is accessible.

Access to the user 2 level allows manual or automatic setting of the output level parameters. An additional Forcing tab page provides access to the forcing and loopback functions. At first, the user is in the ‘normal’ mode ; a level 2 user can switch to the ‘maintenance’ mode and vice-versa via the ‘mode’ menu

8.13.1 Switching from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode and vice-versa

FIGURE 22 – MAINTENANCE MENU

To switch from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode:

Select Mode>Normal mode.

Only the Levels tab page is available.

To switch from the Normal mode to the Maintenance mode:

Select Mode>Maintenance.

In the Maintenance mode, the <Force/lock/Loop> tab page is available.

Page 254: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 52/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.13.2 Maintenance status bar

The Maintenance status bar displays the following elements:

• Line status (locked / unlocked)

• Relay status (locked / unlocked)

• Loopback status on / off.

FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR

8.13.3 Reading the input levels measurement

This screen, accessible from the user level 0, allows reading the input levels in the graphic form.

The digital values are also displayed in the upper part of the screen.

The value range is -45 to 15 dBr, nominal value for receiver alignment being 0 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.

Click the button to display the values to be refreshed.

Click the Automatic refresh button to display the values to be refreshed regularly.

Page 255: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 53/68

8.13.4 Configuring the output levels setting

This screen, accessible from the user level 2, allows defining the DIP frequencies, as well as the guard output levels.

The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.

Procedure

For the guard frequency and command frequency 1 to 4:

Select the output level using the scrolling button.

Once the operation has been completed, click the button.

8.13.5 Configuring the reception level

8.13.5.1 Manually

This screen, accessible on level 2, allows to adjust the level of reception.

Guard frequency

The level of reception of guard frequencies is expressed directly in dBm.

This level can be set between -45 dBm and +15 dBm.

Display accuracy is ± 0.1dBm.

Command / Guard relative level

The Commands / Guard relative level is expressed in dB.

This level is adjustable between 0 and +6dB in the normal mode and between 0 and +16dB in the enhanced mode.

Settings are made while considering the level of output and attenuation of the medium.

Page 256: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 54/68 e-terragridcom DIP

Display accuracy is ± 0.1dBm.

Settings of the Guard and Commands / Guard relative level parameters are independent, and must be sent separately.

Procedure

Select the Guard level of reception using the scrolling button.

Click the button.

Select the Commands / Guard relative level parameter using the scrolling button.

Click the button.

To save the settings after a reset, refer to § 8.12.5.3.

8.13.5.2 Align automatically

The button is accessible on the user 2 level.

This command launches receiver alignment.

This alignment is automatic and performed according to the reception level of the guard frequency. At the end of the alignment, the reception level of the guard frequency changes.

To launch automatic alignment:

Click the button.

The following window opens, indicating that automatic alignment has started:

Once the alignment is complete, the following message is displayed:

Click the button.

To save the settings after a reset, refer to the next paragraph.

8.13.5.3 Saving the settings for output level and reception level

The settings of the output level and reception level (manual or automatic) are lost after a reset.

Once the settings are complete, close the Maintenance window to maintain them:

A pop-up window opens:

Page 257: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 55/68

Answer.

A message appears, notifying that the DIP has been reset. The settings are stored in flash memory, and remain active after the reset.

8.13.6 Maintenance - Forcing

This tab page is accessible on the user 2 level and in the Maintenance mode.

To access the Forcing / Blocking / Loopback window, open the Maintenance window (see § 8.12) and select the Force / Lock / Loop tab.

FIGURE 24 – MAINTENANCE - FORCING

Page 258: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 56/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.13.6.1 Configuring the Unlocking / Loopback parameters

Loop

In this mode, the transmission is looped back to reception even if access to the sending medium is blocked.

Procedure

To activate / deactivate loopback: select Active / Inactive by clicking the appropriate button.

Unlock

The AF line and contact statuses are:

• Unlocked

• Locked

Unlock AF line: this status is used to connect the teleprotection transmitter to the transmission line. This operating mode introduces the risk of untimely command transmission, as the operator can simulate the acquisition of a command.

Lock AF line: this status is used to disconnect the teleprotection transmitter from the transmission line. The operator can then simulate safely a command acquisition.

Contact Relay unlocking: when this status is activated, the status of the output relays complies with the command conditions present in the reception line. This operating mode introduces the risk of untimely command transmission, in case of loopback.

Contact Relay locking: when this status is activated, the status of the output relays are forced to the idle status, regardless of the command conditions present in the reception line.

Procedure

To unblock a AF line:

Check the AF Line box.

To block a AF line:

Uncheck the AF Line box.

To unblock a relay:

Check the Relay box.

To block a relay:

Uncheck the Relay box.

When the Loopback and Locking parameters are configured:

Click the button.

Page 259: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 57/68

Check the condition for updating the settings in the bottom bar:

8.13.6.1.1 Forcing the transmitter

The HMI does not operate as a simulator. More particularly, forcing triggers actual command transmissions and rendering.

Therefore, untimely use of these commands may have a severe impact on the operation.

This screen is used to send frequencies corresponding to different statuses over unlocked lines: standby, command or test message. To use this feature, the copy relays must be unlocked at all times.

To force a frequency:

Check the appropriate box.

Click the button.

The forced frequency becomes red:

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

8.13.6.1.2 Forcing output relays

Page 260: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 58/68 e-terragridcom DIP

This screen is used to force the status of command rendering relays on the local unit. The command output relays will be activated only if the relays are unlocked. The copy relays must be unlocked at all times.

To force an output relay:

Check the appropriate box.

Click the button.

The forced command becomes red:

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

8.13.6.2 Forcing PLC commands

Forcing Transmission Reception

When commands are sent to received via the PLC, transmission / reception of the other signals can be blocked to ensure all power is available for these orders. Transmission and reception signals are sent with the commands to activate the blocking feature.

Forcing PLC commands allows activating the transmission / reception blocking feature, to check its operational status.

To check PLC Emission blocking:

Check the Active box under Transmission.

Click the button.

Page 261: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 59/68

Transmission is displayed in red:

Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 3-10 of connector P18 is closed.

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

To check PLC Reception blocking:

Check the Active box under Reception.

Click the button.

Reception is displayed in red:

Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminal 5 of connector P18 is closed.

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

Active Inactive forcing

When a DIP becomes inactive, the relay of terminals 7-14 of connector P18 closes to inform the PLC. Inactive forcing allows simulating the inactive status of the DIP.

To force the inactive status of the DIP:

Check the Inactive box

It is displayed in red:

Click the button.

Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 5-12 of connector P18 is closed.

IN command

This part allows to check the presence of an external alarm between terminals 6-13 of connector P18.

In case of an external alarm, Active is displayed in yellow:

In case of lack of external alarm, Inactive is displayed in green: .

Page 262: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 60/68 e-terragridcom DIP

8.13.6.3 Alarms forcing

To force the alarms:

Check the Minor or Major box, or both.

Click the button.

The other parts of the window are grayed out and inaccessible.

Check the alarm status LEDs.

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

8.14 Date setup

The DIP>Set date menu allows to read or define the date of the DIP.

To set the date, select DIP>Date Setup. The following window opens:

Set the date in the PC Time / Date section of the window.

Once the information related with the date have been entered,

click the button to copy the settings in the DIP section.

Page 263: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 61/68

Note: the date can also be displayed and set by clicking the button in the upper tool bar.

8.15 Resetting the DIP

To reset the DIP from the DIP menu:

Select DIP>Reset.

A confirmation message is then displayed, in a pop-up window:

Answer .

The following window opens, indicating that resetting is in progress.

After restarting the DIP, check the status of LEDs and lack of alarms.

8.16 <History> Menu

There are two types of history:

• Non time-stamped (counters)

• Time-stamped by the internal clock (events / alarms)

The <History> menu allows to display the following information:

• Events log

• Alarms log

• Counters

The <History> also allows to clear events and alarms histories.

Page 264: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 62/68 e-terragridcom DIP

WARNING: ONCE THE HISTORIES HAVE BEEN CLEARED, THE INFORMATION CAN NO LONGER BE RETRIEVED

8.16.1 Events reading

To read events:

Select History>Events. The following message is displayed when loading events:

The Event window opens.

FIGURE 25 – EXAMPLE OF READ EVENTS LIST

The File menu is used to save and print events files (*.event), but also exit the events file:

The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the files respectively.

The Refresh button refreshes the events list.

The File menu in the main window allows opening the events files (*.event):

The events time-stamped by the internal clock in a list limited to 1785 events. Once the memory is full, any new event replaces the older event saved.

Page 265: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 63/68

8.16.2 Alarms reading

To read the alarms list:

Select History>Alarms. The following message is displayed when loading alarms:

The Alarms window opens.

FIGURE 26 – EXAMPLE OF READ ALARMS LIST

Alarms time-stamped by the internal clock are saved in a list limited to 1785 alarms. Once the memory is full, any new alarm replaces the first alarm saved.

The File menu is used to save and print alarms files (*.alarms), but also exit the alarms file:

The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the files respectively.

Page 266: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 64/68 e-terragridcom DIP

The Refresh button refreshes the alarms list.

The File menu in the main window allows opening the alarms files (*.alarms):

8.16.3 Reading the local command counters

To read the local command counters:

Select History>Counters.

The following window opens:

FIGURE 27 – EXAMPLE OF READ OF COUNTER STATUS

The File menu is used to save and print counter files (*.cnter), but also exit the counter file:

The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the counters respectively.

The File menu in the main window allows opening the counter files (*.cnter):

The memorization capacity of the counters is limited to 65535.

8.16.4 Deleting events

The Erase the events option allows deleting all events displayed in the list.

Note: This option fully deletes system events and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the events at a later date, use the File>Save

Page 267: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 65/68

option to save a copy of the events list before using the Erase>Events option.

To delete the events list currently displayed.

Select History>Erase >Erase events.

A confirmation window opens:

Answer .

Check that the events file is empty by selecting History>Events.

8.16.5 Deleting alarms

The Delete the alarms option allows deleting all alarms displayed in the list.

Note: This option fully deletes system alarms and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the alarms at a later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the alarms list before using the Erase>Alarms option.

To delete the alarms list currently displayed:

Select History>Erase>Erase the events.

The following pop-up window opens:

Page 268: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 66/68 e-terragridcom DIP

Answer .

Check that the alarms file is empty by selecting History>Alarms.

8.17 <Test> Menu

The link test allows checking the ability of the DIP link to sent and receive commands in the bidirectional mode.

The automatic launching of the link test can also be planned daily or hourly (see § 8.5.7 for settings).

Command processing overrides the link test.

To launch the link test:

Select Test>Link test. In case of bad results, a DIP fault is declared.

8.18 <Factory> Menu

This menu offers a single choice

This menu disconnects the battery (the factory exit status).

8.19 <Help> Menu

This menu provides access to the help file and allows to read the software version of the HMI.

Access to the help files

To access the User Manual, select Help>User Manual.

Reading the software version of the HMI

O read the software version of the HMI:

Select Help>About, the following window opens:

Page 269: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

SINGLE TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 67/68

Page 270: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

SINGLE TONE

Page 68/68 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 271: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP

HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

PART 2: DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE

Page 272: DIP User Manual
Page 273: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/74

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 11

2.1 Information presentation 11

2.2 Example in a paragraph 11

3. OVERVIEW 12

3.1 Foreword 12

3.2 System Required 12

3.3 Installing the HMI 12

3.4 First use 12

3.5 Installing the documentation 13

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS 14

4.1 User level structure 14

4.2 Menus 14

5. DIP PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 15

5.1 Rules for Password Creation 15

5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu 15

5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu 16

5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu 17

5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> 17

5.6 Exiting the Password Manager 17

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 18

6.1 Main screen 18

6.2 Header bar 18

6.3 Menu bar 19

6.4 Toolbar 19

6.5 Status bars 19

6.6 Work and dialog zone 20

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION 21

7.1 <Tools> Menu 21

7.2 <File> Menu 21

7.3 <DIP> Menu 22

7.4 <History> Menu 22

7.5 <Test> Menu 22

8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP – DUAL TONE 23

8.1 Launching the HMI 23

Page 274: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 2/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.2 Logging into the DIP 23

8.3 <Tools> Menu 24

8.3.1 Entering a password 24

8.3.2 Returning to level 0 24

8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI 25

8.3.4 Exit the HMI. 25

8.4 <File> Menu 25

8.5 General Configuration Procedure 26

8.6 Creating a configuration File> New 27

8.6.1 Description of the Configuration window 28

8.6.2 Configuration window toolbar 28

8.7 Configuring General Parameters 29

8.7.1 Configuring IRIG-B 29

8.7.2 Configuring HMI speed 29

8.7.3 Configuring Logical Address 29

8.7.4 Configuring on Link test failure 30

8.7.5 Limiting events 31

8.7.6 Entering comments 31

8.8 Configuring Sender Parameters 32

8.8.1 Configuring LF band 33

8.8.2 Configuring sender transmission levels 33

8.8.3 Configuring Command transmission parameters 34

8.8.4 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure 37

8.8.5 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment 39

8.9 Configuring Receiver Parameters 39

8.9.1 Configuring LF band 40

8.9.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level 40

8.9.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Schemes 41

8.9.4 Configuring the status of the restitution relays upon the alarm. 41

8.9.5 Receiver holding delay configuration 41

8.9.6 Configuring unblocking parameters 42

8.9.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration 42

8.10 Configuring Input/output Parameters 43

8.10.1 Configuring I/O Boards 44

8.10.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay 44

8.10.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs 45

8.10.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration 46

8.11 Configuring alarm parameters 46

Page 275: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/74

8.11.1 Configuring the Alarm on external input parameter 47

8.11.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm 47

8.11.3 Configuring Alarm on Signal loss. 48

8.11.4 Configuring Noise Alarm 48

8.11.5 Configuring on Link test failure 49

8.11.6 Configuring the Locking alarm 49

8.11.7 Configuring alarm output delay 50

8.11.8 Sending the alarms configuration 50

8.12 File Configuration Menu 51

8.12.1 Editing a configuration file 51

8.12.2 Saving a configuration file 51

8.12.3 Sending a configuration file 52

8.12.4 Closing a configuration file 52

8.13 <DIP> Menu 52

8.13.1 Reading the configuration 53

8.13.2 Reading the hardware configuration 53

8.13.3 Reading the versions 54

8.13.4 Instant alarm reading 55

8.13.5 Read input / output statuses 55

8.14 DIP Maintenance Menus 56

8.14.1 Switch to Maintenance / Normal mode 57

8.14.2 Maintenance status bar 58

8.14.3 Reading the input level measurement 58

8.14.4 Configuring the output levels setting 59

8.14.5 Configuring the reception level 59

8.14.6 Align automatically 60

8.14.7 Saving level settings. 61

8.14.8 Configuring forcing and loopback 61

8.14.9 Unlocking feature 62

8.14.10 Configuring input/output loopback 63

8.14.11 Forcing the transmitter 63

8.14.12 Forcing output relays 64

8.14.13 Forcing PLC commands 64

8.14.14 Alarms forcing 65

8.15 Date setup 66

8.16 Resetting the DIP 66

8.17 <History> Menu 67

Page 276: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 4/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.17.1 Events reading 67

8.17.2 Alarms reading 69

8.17.3 Reading counters 70

8.17.4 Deleting events 71

8.17.5 Deleting alarms 72

8.18 <Test> Menu 73

8.19 <Factory> Menu 73

8.20 <Help> Menu 73

8.20.1 Access to the help files 73

8.20.2 Reading the software version of the HMI 74

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION 18

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION 18

FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR 19

FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR 19

FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR 19

FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY 20

FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU 24

FIGURE 9 – VERSION SELECTION WINDOW 27

FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION – GENERAL TAB PAGE 27

FIGURE 11 – TOOLBAR 28

FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW 28

FIGURE 13 – CONFIGURATION – SENDER TAB PAGE 32

FIGURE 14 – CONFIGURATION – RECEIVER TAB PAGE 39

FIGURE 15 – INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE 43

FIGURE 16 – I/O BOARDS 44

FIGURE 17 – INPUT FILTER DELAY 44

FIGURE 18 – COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS 45

FIGURE 19 – CONFIGURATION – ALARMS TAB PAGE 46

FIGURE 20 – CONFIGURATION MENU 51

FIGURE 21 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 54

FIGURE 22 – INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW 55

FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS 57

FIGURE 24 – MAINTENANCE – FORCING 61

Page 277: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/74

FIGURE 25 – HISTORY MENU 67

FIGURE 26 – EVENT WINDOW – DUAL TONE 68

FIGURE 27 – ALARMS WINDOW 69

FIGURE 28 – LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS WINDOW 70

Page 278: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 6/74 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 279: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/74

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS

A 24/01/2001 Original issue

B 23/08/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version

C11 12/07/2006 New features and additional technical explanations

D11 14/11/2007 New chapter. Task oriented writing. HMI chapter separated in three sections: digital, Dual Tone analog and dual tone analog

E11 11/02/2008 Minor corrections

A22 20/02/2009 Version 2.2

B22 01/06/2010 Minor corrections

A23 13/01/2011 Version 2.3

Page 280: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 8/74 e-terragridcom DIP

BLANK PAGE

Page 281: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/74

GENERAL

This manual describes the Human-Machine interface of the DIP, i.e. the software application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this unit.

DEFINITIONS

HMI Tool for using the DIP (Human-Machine Interface).

Configuration All the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters (customization components) of a teleprotection.

Configuration File Micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a teleprotection.

Input password Password for accessing the ‘Password Manager’ utility.

User level All the authorized operations corresponding to the level of responsibility of a given operator.

Level password Password for accessing a user level.

NOTE: Windows and PC are registered trademarks.

Page 282: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 10/74 e-terragridcom DIP

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.

(1) As per the option chosen

Page 283: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/74

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

The firmware or software version numbers which may appear in illustrations in this manual may not reflect the latest implemented in the unit; the information is nonetheless current.

2.1 Information presentation

Menu Path are indicated: Menu_level_entry1 >Menu_level_entry2>.

Example: select File >New.

In the text Menu names are between <> example: Example: <DIP> menu.

In the text window names are between <>. Example: <Entry>.

A screen shot shows a button. Example: represents the OK button.

2.2 Example in a paragraph

<HISTORY> MENU NAME BETWEEN <>

To clear events:

Select History>Erase >Erase events

A <Confirmation> window opens:

Answer to delete

Page 284: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 12/74 e-terragridcom DIP

3. OVERVIEW

3.1 Foreword

As it is powerful and easy to use, the DIP Analog teleprotection HMI enables local:

− complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other tools,

− level adjustment without measuring apparatus,

− filing of configurations (=>rationalization of commissioning actions),

− time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics),

− interactive and user-friendly maintenance,

− printing of unit parameters.

3.2 System Required

The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating under Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows XP Service Pack 2. The PC must feature at minimum:

− 40 MB free space on the HD,

− 256 MB RAM.

IMPORTANT: HAVING SEVERAL TASKS RUNNING CONCURRENTLY (DESKTOP OR OTHER TOOLS) MAY CAUSE PC-HMI TRANSMISSION FAULTS. THEREFORE, ALL OTHER APPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI.

When the PC has no serial port, use a PCMCIA converter rather than a USB converter.

3.3 Installing the HMI

For safety purposes, we recommend installing the HMI from a copy of the disc supplied.

Installation:

− Insert the CD-ROM supplied in the drive.

− Run the setup.exe file from the <Run> menu in the Program manager: D\:set up.

− Follow the instructions.

3.4 First use

The language of use of the HMI must be configured the first use.

To launch the application, click the desktop icon “DIP HMI” icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it.

The following window opens:

Page 285: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/74

Click OK to open a scrolling menu to select the language.

Select the language required

Click OK, to open the following window

Restart the application.

3.5 Installing the documentation

The user manuals may be accessible from the HMI. (refer to $7.7)

− Run the batch.exe file from the CD_ROM menu in the Documentation directory.

− Follow the instructions.

This procedure may also be used to update the documentation.

Page 286: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 14/74 e-terragridcom DIP

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS

4.1 User level structure

The DIP places operations in hierarchical command: some actions have no impact on unit operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific responsibility on the part of the operator.

The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2.

Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the command menus are displayed according to user level.

4.2 Menus

Level

Menus 0 2

File new x x

open x x

Tools Identification x x

Returning to level 0 x x

connect x x

disconnect x x

exit x x

DIP * configuration x x

hardware configuration x x

version x x

alarms snapshot x x

input/output x x

reset x

DIP / Date * read x x

write x

DIP / Maintenance * input level measure x x

output levels setting, adjustment receiving alignment and automatic alignment

x

switch to maintenance mode x

unlocking line (security) x

unlocking relay (security) x

local loop back x

transmitter forcing x

commands output forcing x

alarms forcing x

Test * link test x

History * event list x x

alarm list x x

counter list x x

clear event file x

clear alarm file x

Help x x

TABLE 1 – MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL

* To access these menus, you need to be connected.

Page 287: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/74

5. DIP PASSWORD MANAGEMENT

The DIP Security Password Manager application, associated to the HMI application, is used to create, modify, read and delete the passwords.

To launch the application, click the desktop icon “DIP Security” icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it.

For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.

5.1 Rules for Password Creation

Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from the following:

1. upper case (A to Z)

2. lower case (a to z)

3. numbers (0 to 9)

4. ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ¨ | ~

5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu

The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus: <Create> and < List passwords >.

To access the Password Manager menus:

1. Launch the DIP Security application by clicking the desktop icon. The <DIP password management > window opens:

2. Select Password > Input, the < Password Input> window opens:

3. Enter "DIP5000" upper case without the quotes in both windows (only upon first login).

Note: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended upon the first use (see the next paragraph).

4. Click the button.

The following window opens:

Page 288: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 16/74 e-terragridcom DIP

The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available.

5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu

The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password.

Upon first use, use the DIP password (upper case). We recommend to then modify this password.

1. Access the Manager menu (see § 5.2)

2. Select Password > Modify. The following window opens:

3. Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see § 5.1).

Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled.

1. Click the button. The following window opens:

2. Confirm the new password by re-entering it.

Page 289: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/74

5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu

Several passwords may be created.

1. To create user passwords, select < Create password >.

The <Create password > window below opens:

2. Enter the new password in the < Input password > window, in compliance with the rules

for Password Creation (see § 5.1). Enter the password again in the field ‘Confirm password’.

3. Click the button.

4. If required, you may enter other passwords to be defined in the <Enter password> window.

5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords>

To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> in the Password Manager

The list of passwords is displayed.

1. To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the button. A confirmation message is then displayed, Answer yes.

5.6 Exiting the Password Manager

To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select Password>Exit.

Page 290: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 18/74 e-terragridcom DIP

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION

The HMI has an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes.

As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, it is recommended that operators not familiar with WINDOWS refer to the user manual for this environment.

6.1 Main screen

The main screen is composed of functional zones (see the following figures)

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION

6.2 Header bar

The header bar displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.

Page 291: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/74

6.3 Menu bar

The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS menus, displayed according to the current user level (password dependent).

FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR

6.4 Toolbar

The operator can launch commands and read information locally via the toolbar shortcuts

Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.

FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR

6.5 Status bars

Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear displaying the following information.

The bottom bar displays:

5. the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon)

6. the link address

7. the transmission speed of serial port (HMI connection)

8. the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance)

9. any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have triggered this alarm)

10. the user level granted (from 0 to 2 depending on the password)

11. a green led indicating the connection status (OK when flashing)

12. the DSP firmware version

FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR

Page 292: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 20/74 e-terragridcom DIP

6.6 Work and dialog zone

Most commands are also issued using dialogue boxes (see figure 6 below). Six standard Windows tools are used:

13. optional button groups

14. tick boxes

15. command buttons

16. text boxes

17. lists

18. scroll bars

FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY

Page 293: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/74

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION

7.1 <Tools> Menu

Identification: this menu is used to open a window to enter the password and access the corresponding user level. Access to the upper level is protected by password.

Back to level 0: this menu allows to return to level 0, the lowest level of privilege.

Disconnect: this menu disconnects the HMI from the DIP.

Exit: this menu closes the DIP HMI application.

7.2 <File> Menu

New: Creates a configuration file from a default configuration in a DIP version (Dual Tone or Dual tone). When selected a pop-up window opens asking you to choose DIP version (Dual Tone or Dual tone)

Open: Selecting this menu allows the following to be opened:

19. Events files (*.events),

20. Alarm files (*.alarms),

21. Counters files (*.cnter),

22. Config files: Configuration Files.

Page 294: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 22/74 e-terragridcom DIP

7.3 <DIP> Menu

This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local unit:

23. Configuration: Read and modify all configuration parameters,

24. Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters,

25. Maintenance: Used to launch measures, adjust levels and for forcing.

26. Alarms preview: provides a view of the current alarm status,

27. Inputs / Outputs: read input and output status.

28. Versions: read firmware versions.

29. Date Setup: read and write the date and time on the unit.

30. Reset: performs hardware and software resets on the unit.

7.4 <History> Menu

31. Events: read and display event list.

32. Alarms: read and display alarms list.

33. Counters: display the status of input/output commands counters. Counter Information can be saved and printed.

34. Erase: via two sub menus <Erase Events> and <Erase Alarms>, allows event and alarm logs to be deleted from the unit.

7.5 <Test> Menu

This menu enables you to perform a link test on the equipment.

Page 295: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/74

8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP – DUAL TONE

8.1 Launching the HMI

To launch the HMI, click:

Start>Programs>HMIDIP5K>HMIDIP5K>

or by clicking the Desktop HMIDIP5K shortcut.

Launching the DIP HMI allows to:

• log into a DIP

• create a configuration

• modify an existing configuration saved in the PC.

8.2 Logging into the DIP

To log in, click the Connect icon or open the <Tools> menu:

and select <Local connect> to open the <Login> window.

You can choose among the ports found automatically by the HMI or the favorites defined beforehand. To create a new favorite, right-click the location where you wish to place the favorite.

Page 296: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 24/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.3 <Tools> Menu

Once logged in, the <Tools> menu is used to:

35. grant a level to a user according to a password,

36. reset the user level to 0,

37. disconnect the HMI from the DIP,

38. exit the HMI.

FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU

8.3.1 Entering a password

When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0.

To access the higher level 2, the user must enter a password. For more details about user level and password management see § 4. and § 5.

To enter a password:

1. Select Tools>Identification. The following window opens:

2. Enter the password. If the DIP has a password, only this password allows to raise the

HMI to user level 2.

3. Check the level granted (according to the password) in the status bar.

8.3.2 Returning to level 0

The user may return to level 0 at any time.

To set the user level to 0:

1. Select Tools>Return to level 0.

2. Check the user level in the bottom bar.

The DIP can, optionally, have an embedded password.

Page 297: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/74

If you are already a level 2 user, the menu is:

You can also change the embedded password by using this menu option. Please note that if you forget the embedded password, it may be reset only by returning the motherboard (UT148) to the plant.

8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI

1. Select Tools>Disconnect

2. The HMI is disconnected, the <DIP>, <History> menu disappears. The following icons in the upper bar are grayed out and inaccessible:

Information is no longer displayed in the bottom status bar (only is visible).

8.3.4 Exit the HMI.

To exit the HMI:

Select Tools>Exit.

A confirmation messages appears.

Answer .

The HMI closes.

8.4 <File> Menu

The <File> menu provides access to the configuration files.

This menu allows a new configuration to be created or a saved configuration file to be opened.

4 types of file can be opened:

Page 298: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 26/74 e-terragridcom DIP

• *.rtf -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see Figure 9 – configuration – general tab page for the window display).

• *.alarms -> alarm list file for consultation (see Figure 18 – configuration – alarms tab page for the window display)

• *.events -> event list file for consultation

• *.counter -> counter statement for consultation

The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a configuration file:

Select File>New or File>Open,

• Select the DIP Dual Tone version in the <Version selection> window after clicking File>New.

• Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration,

• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).

Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations.

The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration:

• Select DIP>Configuration.

• Modify the displayed configuration.

• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).

8.5 General Configuration Procedure

The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a configuration file:

− Select File>New or File>Open.

− Select the DIP Dual Tone version in the <Version selection> window after clicking File>New.

− Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration,

− Save the changed configuration (File>Save).

Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations.

The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration:

− Select DIP>Configuration.

− Modify the displayed configuration.

− Save the changed configuration (File>Save).

Page 299: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/74

8.6 Creating a configuration File> New

This menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration. This configuration can be modified, saved for later use (even at level 0), or sent to the unit (level2).

Selecting the File>New menu opens a pop up window asking for the DIP version. Select Dual tone in the scroll-down window.

A warning message indicates the minimum version no. from which this type of configuration is accepted, click YES.

FIGURE 8 – VERSION SELECTION WINDOW

After Selecting ‘Dual tone’ in the scroll-down window the <Configuration> window appears.

FIGURE 9 – CONFIGURATION – GENERAL TAB PAGE

Page 300: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 28/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.6.1 Description of the Configuration window

The configuration parameters are divided in 5 tabs:

− General

− Sender

− Receiver

− Input/Output

− Alarms

8.6.2 Configuration window toolbar

FIGURE 10 – TOOLBAR

Clicking the button opens a Synthesis Window displaying the DIP Configuration parameters in text format:

FIGURE 11 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW

Page 301: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/74

8.7 Configuring General Parameters

8.7.1 Configuring IRIG-B

In case of IRIG-B module presence, check On.

Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector.

Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronization signal every 30 seconds).

8.7.2 Configuring HMI speed

It is the communication flow between the HMI and the DIP.

Select the 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps value by checking the corresponding button.

The HMI will attempt to connect at the speed defined, in case of bad link, it will attempt to connect at lower speeds.

8.7.3 Configuring Logical Address

Range value 0 to 255.

Page 302: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 30/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.7.4 Configuring on Link test failure

The Link Test feature is used to automatically and periodically check the transmission medium between the sender and the receiver, by sending a message in a loop.

For Link testing, the frequencies combination F3 and F7, reserved exclusively for test purpose, is used.

To schedule transmission test:

− Select the test periodicity by checking the corresponding button:

Daily: in this case enter the hour and minutes using the scroll-down window.

.

Hourly: in this case enter the minutes using the scroll-down window.

In case of failure of the link test, if no intervention of an operator is considered necessary, the DIP stays in alarm until the next test. If the link is then restored, the equipment will be standardized.

Page 303: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/74

8.7.5 Limiting events

Limits lists stored in the DIP to 255 events and 255 alarms instead of 1785 each.

This may be useful in case of remote access to a network to shorten the information download time.

During an intervention on running equipment, to ensure proper operation of this feature, delete the lists of events and alarms already saved in the DIPs. A warning message appears when checking or unchecking the limitation.

8.7.6 Entering comments

Enter the Source Station, the Destination Station, and your comments in compliance with the following rules:

− Source and destination stations: 20 characters maximum.

− Comments: 70 characters maximum.

Page 304: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 32/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.8 Configuring Sender Parameters

To configure the Sender parameters:

− Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.6).

− Click the Sender Tab page.

FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION – SENDER TAB PAGE

Page 305: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/74

8.8.1 Configuring LF band

The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity.

The useful band is the part of the medium bandwidth used to send signals.

Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window.

Possible values are:

− 300-1900

− 400-2000

− 670-2260

− 850-2450

− 1040-2630

− 1220-2810

− 1400-3000

− 1590-3180

− 2000-3600

8.8.2 Configuring sender transmission levels

The Transmission levels correspond to the signal power allocated to different frequencies composing the guard or a command.

The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.

To configure the Guard transmission levels and Frequency 1 to 7, select, using the scrolling button, the Transmission levels in compliance with the following rule:

Page 306: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 34/74 e-terragridcom DIP

The difference between sending frequency transmission levels must not exceed 16 dBm. If this rule is not applied, a warning message appears when attempting to save the configuration file.

If this warning message appears, modify the transmission levels in consequence.

8.8.3 Configuring Command transmission parameters

The following parameters must be configured when transmitting an input command:

− Holding Delay

− Mode pulsed or not

− Holding delay validation

− Type of application (protection scheme).

8.8.3.1 Sender holding delay configuration

Holding delay Parameter description

The Holding Delay parameter corresponds to the minimum transmission time of a validated command. However, if the corresponding pulsed mode box is checked, this time is a maximum, as shown above.

− Box corresponding to the pulsed mode not checked:

In this case, the transmission time is the maximum value between the holding delay defined and the input signal command duration.

Page 307: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/74

Example 1: Holding delay: 100 ms.

− The presence time of the first input signal command is 5ms.

As the 100 ms holding time exceeds the command time of 5 ms: The command will be transmitted during 100 ms.

− The presence time of the second input signal command is 120 ms.

As the 120 ms command time exceeds the holding time of 100 ms: The command will be transmitted during 120 ms.

Parameter Values

Parameter values are in ms.

Range value 0 to 500 ms.

− Box corresponding to the pulsed mode checked:

In this case, the transmission time is the minimum value between the holding delay defined and the input signal command duration.

Example 2: Holding delay: 150 ms.

− The presence time of the third input signal command is 5ms.

As the 150 ms holding time exceeds the command time of 5 ms: The command will be transmitted in 5 ms only.

− The presence time of the fourth input signal command is 200 ms.

As the 200 ms command time exceeds the Holding time of 150 ms: The command will be transmitted during a pulsed time of 150 ms.

Parameter Values

Parameter values are in ms.

Range value 20 to 500 ms.

Procedure

For each command, select the Holding Delay by positioning the scrolling button.

NOTE: For more information on this parameter, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008

8.8.3.2 Configuring Sender input validation delay.

This configuration is particular to certain specific applications. It is the validation delay parameter applicable to holding time activation. It does not apply when the pulsed mode box is checked.

Valid Hold Time Parameter description

Page 308: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 36/74 e-terragridcom DIP

At the receipt end the restitution of a command requires a processing time that varies according to the chosen protection scheme. To be rebuilt an input command must be transmitted during a time at least equal to the processing time.

The Holding Valid Delay corresponds to a threshold applied to an input signal command duration conditioning the activation of the Holding Delay.

The commands present at the input for a time less than the Validation delay of the holding time parameter are transmitted without considering the holding time programmed.

This means that a command which is too short will be transmitted but we accept that restitution is not guaranteed as it is of a time shorter than the processing time required by the application.

The commands present at the input whose duration is greater than the Holding Delay, are validated and transmitted for a minimum duration corresponding to the Holding Delay parameter.

When the Holding Delay parameter is greater than the processing reception duration, reception of input command sent in such condition is guaranteed to be lossless.

Parameter Values

Parameter values are in ms.

Range value 0 to 5 ms.

Example

E.g. holding delay 50ms, input validation delay 5ms:

Command present at input for 3ms, a duration less than Holding Delay validation: the <Holding delay> is not considered, the command is sent within 3 ms without prolongation.

Command present at input for 6 ms, a command acquisition duration exceeding that of the Holding Delay validation parameter: The <Holding delay> is taken into account and the command is transmitted for the Holding Delay: 50 ms.

Input command 60 ms: command acquisition duration more than the Holding Delay validation parameter. Input command more than the Holding Delay. The command is transmitted during 60 ms.

Procedure

For each command, select the Holding Delay validation by positioning the scrolling button.

NOTE: For more information on this parameter, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008

8.8.3.3 Configuring the type of application of the sender

This parameter depends on the protection schemes teleprotections will operate.

Parameter Description

Permissive tripping commands are always monitored by a protection relay. The circuit breaker is tripped when receipt of a teleprotection command coincides with operation of the

Page 309: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/74

protection relay at the receiving end responding to a system fault. The intention of these schemes is to speed up tripping for faults occurring within the protected zone.

Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element that detects faults external to the protected zone. Detection of an external fault at the local end of a protected circuit results in a blocking signal being transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, receipt of the blocking signal prevents the remote end protection operating if it had detected the external fault. The risk of a spurious trip is higher.

Direct tripping: remote triggering signals sent directly to the main trigger relay. Reception of the command triggers trips the circuit breaker. The method of communication must be reliable and secure because any signal detected at the receiving end will cause a trip of the circuit at that end.

Teleprotection includes two groups of protection classes, one standard and the other secured. Secured versions are more reliable, but slower.

During configuration, only one or the other of these two groups can be chosen

Procedure

For each command, select the type of application by selecting the value with the scroll down window.

When selecting parameters from two groups by error, an error message appears.

8.8.4 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure

Depending on user needs and of the characteristics of input signals applied to the DIP, notably their duration, two procedures are available.

Page 310: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 38/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.8.4.1 Procedure without validation delay

For each command

1. Using the scroll-down window select a type of application.

Option:

2. Using the scroll-down window select a Holding Delay and check the Pulsed mode or not.

3. Click the button.

4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.

8.8.4.2 Procedure without validation delay

For each command

1. Using the scroll-down window select a type of application.

2. Using the scroll-down window select the value for Holding Delay.

3. Click the button.

Note: The <Holding Delay> parameter is automatically set to a minimum value compatible with the application scheme.

4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.

Holding delay, Holding delay validation, and Type of application parameters are dependent.

If the procedure indicated is not applied (e.g. Holding time selected before the types of application, incompatibilities may occur.

In case of incompatibility when selecting the protection schemes, warning messages are displayed.

More particularly, if the holding time is incompatible, the following warning message is displayed:

In this case, the minimum value for holding time is adjusted automatically to a value compatible with the protection scheme.

Page 311: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/74

8.8.5 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment

When you have completed Sender Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button. The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

8.9 Configuring Receiver Parameters

FIGURE 13 – CONFIGURATION – RECEIVER TAB PAGE

Page 312: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 40/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.9.1 Configuring LF band

The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity.

The useful band is the part of the medium bandwidth used to send signals. This may be different from the useful band chosen for the transmitter.

Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window.

Possible values are:

− 300-1900

− 400-2000

− 670-2260

− 850-2450

− 1040-2630

− 1220-2810

− 1400-3000

− 1590-3180

− 2000-3600

8.9.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level

Guard Signal

This parameter defines the Guard Signal reception level.

Parameter values are in dBm.

Value Range -40 to 0 dBm.

Select the Guard Signal input level using the scrolling button.

Command / Guard relative frequency level.

This parameter corresponds to the relative level between command frequencies reception level and Guard Signal. For example, it is used to compensate the effect of a boosting upon a transmission by PLC.

Parameter values are in dB.

Page 313: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/74

Value Range -6 + 6 dB

Select Commands / Guard Gain using the scrolling button.

Note: The Receiver Input level can also be set from the Maintenance window, manually or automatically.

8.9.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Schemes

Parameter Description

There are a six types of application, the principle is identical as when configuring the transmitter. For more detail, refer to § 0 Configuring the types of transmitter application

When allocating a type of protection to commands, check that all types chosen belong to the same group (standard or reinforced)

Procedure

For each command

− Select the Type in the scrolling window.

Note: Check that the type of protection selected belongs to the same range.

8.9.4 Configuring the status of the restitution relays upon the alarm.

Parameter Description

Inactive: the command restitution relay switches to inactive in case of alarm.

Former State : the restitution relay switch remains open or closed, even in case of alarm. The alarm has no impact on the status of the switch.

For each command

− Select the Output relay status upon alarm parameter using the scrolling window.

8.9.5 Receiver holding delay configuration

This parameter defines the minimum holding delay of command reception switches.

Page 314: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 42/74 e-terragridcom DIP

Range value 0 to 3000 ms by 1 ms steps.

Using the scroll-down window select the value for Holding Delay.

NOTE: For more information on this parameter, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008.

8.9.6 Configuring unblocking parameters

Unblocking

This function, commonly admitted under the name unblocking, is used to send a pulsed command in case of loss or drop in guard signal reception.

Only command which type is Permissive tripping can be unblocked. Each command can be unblocked, independently of the others.

For each command to unblock, check the corresponding box.

Unblocking threshold

It is the level of drop in guard signal reception from which the order is unblocked.

Parameter values are in dB. The value range is -20 to -10 dB. Display accuracy is ± 0.1dB.

Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button or enter the value of the corresponding window.

Unblocking delay

It is the time during which the unblocking condition is present before it becomes effective.

Parameter values are in ms. Range value 5 to 100 ms. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 ms.

Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button or enter the value of the corresponding window.

Command delay

Parameter values are in ms. Range value 30 to 500 ms. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 ms.

Select the unblocking threshold time using the scrolling button or enter the value of the corresponding window.

8.9.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration

When you have completed Receiver Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Page 315: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/74

Click the button. The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.

8.10 Configuring Input/output Parameters

To configure Input/Output parameters:

− Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.6).

FIGURE 14 – INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE

Page 316: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 44/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.10.1 Configuring I/O Boards

An input-output board allows managing up to 4 commands. A second board provides access to the Input combination logic menu.

FIGURE 15 – I/O BOARDS

Select the I/O Boards parameter corresponding to your hardware configuration by checking the corresponding box.

8.10.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay

FIGURE 16 – INPUT FILTER DELAY

Parameter Description

The Input Filter on inputs is a threshold applied to the input command signal. In case of disturbance, it allows to exclude a noise peak which may be considered as being a command.

Commands with a duration less than the Input Filter Delay duration are not transmitted.

Commands with a duration more than the Input Filter Delay duration are validated and transmitted.

Therefore, the propagation time of the transmitted command measured between the appearance of the signal at the input and restitution will be increased by the delay of the Input Filter parameter.

Parameter value

Range 0 to 100 ms in 1 ms steps.

Procedure

For each command to which an input filter delay is to be applied:

Select the value using the scrolling button or enter the parameter directly.

Page 317: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 45/74

8.10.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs

This panel is only available having configured 2 I/O boards.

FIGURE 17 – COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS

It is used to allocate commands with logical associations between input signals.

For each command the possible choices are:

− IN1: command 1 is allocated to the signal connected to the EN1 input (P10 connector)

− IN2: command 1 is allocated to the signal connected to the EN1 input (P10 connector)

− EN1 or EN2: command 1 is allocated to the result of the OR operator applied to the signal connected on the EN1 input (P10 connector) and EN2 input (P10 connector) i.e. command 1 will be transmitted upon a signal already present on the EN1 or EN2 inputs

− EN1 and EN2: command 1 is allocated to the result of the AND operator applied to the input signal connected to the EN1 input (P10 connector) and EN2 input (P10 connector). i.e. command 1 will be transmitted upon signals already present on the EN1 and EN2 inputs

For command 2 same explanation replacing EN1 by EN3 and EN2 by EN4.

For command 3 same explanation replacing EN1 by EN5, EN2 by EN6 and P10 connector by P12 connector.

For command 4 same explanation replacing EN1 by EN7, EN2 by EN8 and P10 connector by P12 connector.

Page 318: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 46/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.10.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration

When you have completed Input/Output Parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button. The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the status of LEDs after the reset and lack of alarms.

8.11 Configuring alarm parameters

To configure alarm parameters:

Open the Configuration window (see § 8.6).

Click the Alarms tab page.

FIGURE 18 – CONFIGURATION – ALARMS TAB PAGE

NOTE: A minor alarm indicates a problem but teleprotection continues operating.

A major alarm blocks teleprotection.

Page 319: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 47/74

8.11.1 Configuring the Alarm on external input parameter

The External alarm input comes from the transmission equipment whose DIP is connected (PLC or other). It allows to block teleprotection, after a time defined in this window, when the transmission equipment is in alarm.

The transmission equipment and DIP must be interconnected with a special connection cable supporting these alarm wires. The wiring is indicated in the installation manual.

Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0 to 2.5 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.

To configure Alarm on External Input:

− Check the Alarm on external input box,

− Select the delay value using the scrolling button or enter it directly.

− Check the button for level Minor or Major button.

8.11.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm

This alarm is set if the input command duration is more than the parameter value.

Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0.5 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.

To configure Input Command Duration Alarm:

− Check the Input Command Duration Alarm box,

− Select the delay value using the scrolling button or enter it directly.

− Select the alarm level, Minor or Major.

Page 320: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 48/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.11.3 Configuring Alarm on Signal loss.

Alarm on Signal loss

This alarm occurs if the Signal reception level at the input of the receiver, and measured through internal digital filter, is under the threshold during a Delay.

The reference level is that configured on § 8.9.2 Configuring the input level of the receiver.

The alarm is displayed in the Alarms preview window and the major alarm LED is lit

Threshold

Defines the relative level under which an alarm is triggered.

Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -16 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.

Delay

Defines the low level signal delay from which an alarm is triggered.

Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 1 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.

To configure the Signal Loss Alarm parameters:

− Select the threshold level using the scrolling button or enter it directly.

− Select the delay using the scrolling button or enter it directly.

8.11.4 Configuring Noise Alarm

Noise alarm

This alarm occurs if the noise level, measured through internal digital filter, is above a Threshold during a Delay.

The reference level is that configured on § 8.9.2 Configuring the input level of the receiver.

The alarm is displayed in the Alarms preview window and the major alarm LED is lit

Threshold

Defines the difference between noise measured and the reference level of the guard signal at the input of the receiver. The alarm is triggered when this gap is less or equal to the threshold.

Page 321: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 49/74

Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -12 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.

Delay

Parameter values are in s. The value range is 1 to 10 s. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 s.

To configure Noise Alarm:

− Select the threshold level using the scrolling button or enter it directly.

− Select the delay using the scrolling button or enter it directly.

8.11.5 Configuring on Link test failure

The Link test can be periodical (Daily or Hourly) launched (for settings, see § 8.7.4 Configuring the link test).

A punctual link test can also be launched from the toolbar (Menu Test > Link Test).

In case of failed test, the latter may be repeated 3 times in a row. If the failure persists, an alarm is triggered. An alarm status is displayed in the Alarm Snapshot window.

To configure this parameter, select the Minor or Major alarm level by checking the corresponding box.

When a minor alarm has been defined, a new punctual test or the next programmed can be performed. The alarm will be cleared or not, according to the result.

If a major alarm has been defined, the equipment will be blocked and an intervention required.

8.11.6 Configuring the Locking alarm

This alarm is triggered when the transmission medium is highly disturbed and excessive signals present at the input of the receiver over a given time may cause a risk for security or reliability of the protection scheme.

If these conditions lasts for a time exceeding that defined by the user, the alarm is displayed in the Alarms preview window and the major alarm LED is lit The equipment is blocked until the medium is normalized.

Parameter values are expressed in s. The value range is 1 to 10 s.

To configure this parameter:

Check the Locking alarm box.

Select the parameter value using the scrolling button or enter it directly.

Page 322: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 50/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.11.7 Configuring alarm output delay

Alarm outputs delay:

Closing of the contact relays can be delayed.

Possible values are:

− 0

− 2.5 s

− 5 s

− 10 s

There are 4 relays, two are dedicated to major alarms and the other two to minor alarms.

Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button.

8.11.8 Sending the alarms configuration

When you have completed the Alarms parameters configuration as described above:

Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.

Click the button. The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.

Page 323: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 51/74

8.12 File Configuration Menu

FIGURE 19 – CONFIGURATION MENU

This menu allows configuration files to be edited, saved, sent and closed.

8.12.1 Editing a configuration file

The Edit menu is used to display a synthesis Parameter values window.

To edit a configuration file in the Configuration window:

Select File > Edit.

Click the button. The following window opens:

8.12.2 Saving a configuration file

Save: this menu opens a standard Windowsdialog box allowing the displayed configuration to be saved in a file.

To save a configuration file:

Page 324: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 52/74 e-terragridcom DIP

Select File > Save.

Give a path for the saved file and name it.

8.12.3 Sending a configuration file

Send: This menu, accessible from user level 2, is used to send the HMI displayed configuration to the unit. After receiving the configuration file, the unit resets. When the unit restarts, the sent configuration is taken into account.

A configuration window is opened in the HMI using the menus File > New or File > Open or DIP > Configuration.

Once modified, the configuration file can be sent to the unit using the menu File >Send or

the button.

To send a configuration file:

Select File > Send or click on the button.

The following window opens:

The DIP resets.

Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.

8.12.4 Closing a configuration file

Exit: This menu closes the configuration window.

To close a configuration window select File > Exit

8.13 <DIP> Menu

The <DIP> menu allows to display:

− Configuration

− Hardware configuration

− Alarms snapshot

− Inputs / Outputs

Page 325: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 53/74

− Versions

− Date Setup

Refer to section 8.14 for more details.

The DIP menu allows to launch the commands:

− Reset.

− Save environment

8.13.1 Reading the configuration

To read the configuration parameters:

Select DIP> Configuration. The Configuration window opens:

When opening the Configuration window, the user can modify the configuration parameters (see § 8.5 and next).

8.13.2 Reading the hardware configuration

To read the hardware configuration:

Select DIP> Hardware configuration.

The Hardware window opens:

Page 326: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 54/74 e-terragridcom DIP

FIGURE 20 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW

This window shows the hardware configuration. The units installed are accessible and the appropriate box checked. Units not installed are grayed out and not legible.

8.13.3 Reading the versions

This menu allows to read the version of the EPLD and DSP firmware.

To read the version:

Select DIP>Versions.

The following window opens:

Page 327: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 55/74

8.13.4 Instant alarm reading

To read the alarms statuses in Alarms preview:

Select DIP> Preview alarms.

Check the <Auto update> box to refresh the values regularly.

8.13.5 Read input / output statuses

To read input / output statuses:

Select DIP> Input / Output.

The following Input / Output Statuses window opens:

FIGURE 21 – INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW

Page 328: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 56/74 e-terragridcom DIP

The Input / Output Statuses parameter represents the status of commands acquired and rendered. Two statuses are possible: <Active and Inactive>.

− Inactive command = Inputs in black and Outputs in blue

− Active command = Inputs and Outputs in red

Example of active command:

A signal command is active on EN1, the matching input is red.

The signal is transmitted, Tx C1 in red,

The status of the R1 command restitution is active and red.

8.14 DIP Maintenance Menus

The DIP>Maintenance menu allows performing the following operations:

− Switch to maintenance or normal mode

− Unblock line or relay

− Local loop back

− Forcing transmission, reception or an alarm

− Reset events or alarms (local or remote)

− To access the Maintenance menus:

− Select DIP>Maintenance, the following window opens (user 2 level):

Page 329: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 57/74

FIGURE 22 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS

The maintenance features available depend on the user level:

− User level 0: only reading the input level is accessible.

− User level 2: access to the output level, reception level, and Forcing / Loopback / Blocking tab page is lost.

8.14.1 Switch to Maintenance / Normal mode

Switching to the maintenance mode is available from user 2 level.

To switch from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode:

Select Mode>Normal mode.

In the normal mode, the <Level> tab page is available.

To switch from the Normal mode to the Maintenance mode:

Select Mode>Maintenance.

In the Maintenance mode, the <Forcing / Locking / Looping> tab page is available.

Page 330: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 58/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.14.2 Maintenance status bar

The Maintenance status bar displays the following elements:

− Line status (blocked / unblocked)

− Relay status (blocked / unblocked)

− Loopback status on / off.

8.14.3 Reading the input level measurement

This screen, accessible from the user level 0, allows reading the input level in the graphic form.

The digital values are also displayed in the upper part of the screen.

The value range is -45 to 15 dBr, nominal value for receiver alignment being 0 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.

Click the button to display the values to be refreshed.

Click the Automatic refresh button to display the values to be refreshed regularly.

Page 331: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 59/74

8.14.4 Configuring the output levels setting

This screen, accessible from the user level 2, allows defining the guard signal output levels as well as those of the command frequencies.

The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.

Procedure

For the guard frequency and frequency 1 to 7:

Select the output level using the scrolling button or enter it directly.

Once the operation has been completed, click the button.

Settings are active immediately, but will not be saved if the DIP is reset. For saving, refer to § 0

8.14.5 Configuring the reception level

This screen, accessible from user 2 level, allows to adjust the level of reception.

Guard frequency

The level of reception of guard frequencies is expressed directly in dBm.

This level can be set between -45 dBm and +15 dBm.

Display accuracy is ± 0.1dBm.

Command / Guard relative level

The Commands / Guard relative level is expressed in dB.

Page 332: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 60/74 e-terragridcom DIP

This level is adjustable between 0 and +6dB in the normal mode and between 0 and +16dB in the enhanced mode.

Settings are made while considering the level of output and attenuation of the medium.

Display accuracy is ± 0.1dBm.

Settings of the Guard and Commands / Guard relative level parameters are independent, and must be sent separately.

Procedure

Select the output level using the Guard scrolling button or enter it directly.

Click the button.

Select the Command / Guard relative level scrolling button or enter it directly.

Click the button.

Settings are active immediately, but will not be saved if the DIP is reset. For saving, refer to § 0

8.14.6 Align automatically

This procedure allows automatic adjustment of the alignment level of the receiver in respect of the guard signal received.

During the automatic setting procedure, check that the line and relays are properly locked (see §8.14.2.). Indeed, if the unblocking function is programmed, an unblocking error can be issued when the difference between the new setting and the previous exceeds the threshold programmed. (see § 8.9.6)

To launch automatic alignment:

The button is accessible on the user 2 level.

The following window opens, indicating that automatic alignment has started:

Once the alignment is complete, the following message is displayed:

Click the button.

Settings are active immediately, but will not be saved if the DIP is reset. For saving, refer to the next paragraph.

Page 333: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 61/74

8.14.7 Saving level settings.

The settings of the output level and reception level (manual or automatic) are active but lost after a reset.

Once the settings are complete, close the Maintenance window to save them:

A pop-up window opens:

Answer .

A message appears, confirming that the DIP has been reset.

The settings are stored in flash memory, and remain active after a potential reset.

8.14.8 Configuring forcing and loopback

This tab page is accessible on the user 2 level and in the Maintenance mode.

To access the Forcing / Blocking / Loopback window, open the Maintenance window and select the Forcing / Blocking / Loopback tab page.

FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE – FORCING

Page 334: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 62/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.14.9 Unlocking feature

This window is common to two features, unlocking and loopback ;

The AF line statuses and relays are:

− Unblocked

− Blocked

Unlock AF line: this status is used to connect the teleprotection transmitter to the transmission line. This operating mode allows sending the commands issued in the maintenance mode over the transmission link. During a maintenance operation, apply all precautions, considering the risk of untimely command transmission commands, as the operator can simulate the acquisition of a command.

Lock AF line: this status is used to disconnect the teleprotection transmitter from the transmission line. No maintenance operation will be transmitted online. The operator can then simulate safely a command acquisition.

Relay unlocking: when this status is activated, the output of the relays complies with the command conditions present in the reception line. Take all precautions required during maintenance operations, as this operating mode introduces the risk of untimely command reception in case of simulation of command restitution by the operator.

Relay locking: when this status is activated, the status of the output relays are forced to the inactive status, regardless of the command conditions present in the reception line.

Procedure

To unlock Line AF:

Check the Line AF box

To lock Line AF

Un –Check the line AF box

To unlock Contact Relay

Check the Contact Relay box

To lock Contact relay

Un –Check the Contact Relay box

Once the Loop and Unlock parameters are configured:

Click the button,

Check the update status of your settings in the bottom bar:

Page 335: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 63/74

8.14.10 Configuring input/output loopback

Loopback

In this mode, the transmission is looped back to reception even if access to the sending medium is blocked.

Procedure

To activate loopback:

Select Active by checking the appropriate box.

To deactivate the loopback:

Select Inactive by checking the appropriate box.

Click the button.

Check the condition for updating the settings in the bottom bar:

8.14.11 Forcing the transmitter

Freq 8 corresponds to the guard frequency, Freq 1 to Freq 7 are used to code the commands.

As two frequencies are required to code commands, and the frequencies being forced separately, there is no risk of sending a command by frequency forcing.

This screen is used to send frequencies corresponding to different statuses over unblocked lines: inactivity, command or test message. To use this feature, the copy relays must be unblocked at all times.

To force a frequency:

Check the appropriate box.

Click the button.

The forced frequency becomes red:

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

Page 336: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 64/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.14.12 Forcing output relays

This screen is used to force the status of command rendering relays on the local unit. The command output relays will be activated only if the relays are unblocked. The copy relays must be unblocked at all times.

To force an output relay:

Check the appropriate box.

Click the button.

The forced command becomes red:

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

8.14.13 Forcing PLC commands

Forcing Transmission Reception

When commands are sent or received via the PLC, transmission / reception of the other signals (telephony, data) can be blocked to ensure all power is available for these orders. Transmission and reception signals are sent with the commands to activate the blocking feature.

Forcing PLC commands allows activating the transmission / reception blocking feature, to check its operational status.

− Check PLC transmission blocking (BLE feature):

Check the Active box under Transmission.

Page 337: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 65/74

Click the button.

The active box turns red

Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay is activated, the contact between the terminals 3 and 10 of connector P18 is closed.

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

− Check PLC transmission blocking (BLR feature):

Check the Active box under Reception.

Click the button.

The active box turns red:

Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 5-12 of connector P18 is closed.

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

− Active Inactive forcing

When a DIP becomes inactive (supply failure, major alarm), the relay of terminals 7-14 of connector P18 (presence circuit) closes to inform the PLC. Inactive forcing allows simulating the absence of the DIP.

To force the inactive status of the DIP:

Check the Inactive box

The Inactive box turns red:

Click the button.

Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 7-14 of connector P18 is closed.

− EXT command

This part allows to check the presence of an external alarm between terminals 6-13 of connector P18. This contact allows the DIP to be informed of the presence of the equipment it is connected to (e.g. PLC)

In case of an external alarm, Active is displayed in yellow:

In case of lack of external alarm, Inactive is displayed in green: .

8.14.14 Alarms forcing

This function allows forcing the contacts of the major and minor alarms

Page 338: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 66/74 e-terragridcom DIP

To force the alarms:

Check the Minor or Major box, or both.

Click the button.

The other parts of the window are grayed out and inaccessible.

Check the alarms status LEDs, check that the switches of corresponding alarms on connector P16 are closed.

To interrupt forcing, click the button.

8.15 Date setup

Set the date in the PC Time / Date section of the window.

By default, the PC parameters are proposed. For other choices, enter the information related with the date and time required,

Click the button to copy the settings in the DIP section.

Note: The date can also be displayed and set by clicking the button in the upper tool bar.

8.16 Resetting the DIP

To reset the DIP from the DIP menu:

Select DIP> Reset.

A confirmation message is then displayed, in a scroll down window:

Page 339: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 67/74

Answer .

The following window opens, indicating that resetting is in progress.

After restarting the DIP, check the status of LEDs and lack of alarms.

8.17 <History> Menu

FIGURE 24 – HISTORY MENU

There are two types of history:

− Non time-stamped (counters)

− Time-stamped by the internal clock (events / alarms)

The <History> menu allows to display the following information:

− Events files

− Alarms files

− Counters

The <History> also allows to clear events and alarms histories.

CAUTION: ONCE THE HISTORIES HAVE BEEN CLEARED, THE INFORMATION CAN NO LONGER BE RETRIEVED

8.17.1 Events reading

To read events:

Select History>Events. The following message is displayed in a pop-up window when loading events:

Page 340: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 68/74 e-terragridcom DIP

Note: Events reading is also possible by clicking the button in the upper tool bar.

The memory has a capacity of 1785 events, it may be limited to 255 per configuration (see § 8.7.5 Limiting events)

FIGURE 25 – EVENT WINDOW – DUAL TONE

The File menu is used to save and print events files (*.event), but also exit the events file:

The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the files respectively.

The Refresh button refreshes the events list.

The File menu in the main window allows opening the events files (*.event):

Page 341: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 69/74

The events time-stamped by the internal clock are saved in a list limited to 1785 events. Once the memory is full, any new event replaces the older event saved.

8.17.2 Alarms reading

To read the alarms:

Select History>Alarms. The following message is displayed in a pop-up window when loading alarms:

Note: Alarms reading is also possible by clicking the button in the upper tool bar.

FIGURE 26 – ALARMS WINDOW

The File menu is used to save and print alarms files (*.alarm), but also exit the alarms file:

Page 342: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 70/74 e-terragridcom DIP

The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the files respectively.

The Refresh button refreshes the alarms list.

The File menu in the main window allows the alarms files (*.alarm):

The alarms time-stamped by the internal clock are saved in a list limited to 1785 events. Once the memory is full, any new alarm replaces the first alarm saved.

8.17.3 Reading counters

To read information of the counters, select History > Counters. The following screen opens.

FIGURE 27 – LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS WINDOW

The File menu is used to save and print counter files (*.cnter), but also exit the counter file:

The Save and Print and refresh buttons allow to save, print or update the files respectively.

Page 343: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 71/74

The File menu in the main window allows opening the counter files (*.cnter):

The memorization capacity of the counters is limited to 65535.

8.17.4 Deleting events

The Delete the events option allows deleting all events displayed in the list.

Note: This option fully deletes system events and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the events at a later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the events list before using the Delete>Events option.

To delete the events list currently displayed.

Select History>Delete >Delete events.

A confirmation window opens:

Answer .

Check that the events file is empty by selecting History>Events.

Page 344: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 72/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.17.5 Deleting alarms

The Delete the alarms option allows deleting all alarms displayed in the list.

Note: This option fully deletes system alarms and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the alarms at a later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the alarms list before using the Delete>Alarms option.

To delete the alarms list currently displayed:

Select History>Delete >Delete alarms.

A confirmation window opens:

Answer .

Check that the alarms file is empty by selecting History>Alarms.

Page 345: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/A23

DUAL TONE

e-terragridcom DIP Page 73/74

8.18 <Test> Menu

The link test allows checking the ability of the DIP link to sent and receive commands in the bidirectional mode.

The automatic launching of the link test can also be planned daily or hourly (see § 8.5.7 for settings).

Command processing overrides the link test.

To launch the link test:

Select Test>Link test.

In case of bad results after 3 tests, a DIP fault is declared.

A minor or major alarm is defined, according to the alarm configuration (refer to § ).

When the alarm is defined as minor, the next link test, automatic or not, normalizes or maintains the alarm.

8.19 <Factory> Menu

This menu offers a single choice

This menu disconnects the battery (the factory exit status). The latter is restarted automatically once the date set. (see § 0)

8.20 <Help> Menu

This menu provides access to the help documentation and allows to read the software version of the HMI.

8.20.1 Access to the help files

To access the User Manual, select Help>User Manual.

Click the manual chosen, the corresponding pdf document opens.

Page 346: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/A23

Human Machine Interface

DUAL TONE

Page 74/74 e-terragridcom DIP

8.20.2 Reading the software version of the HMI

To read the software version of the HMI:

Select Help>About, the following window opens:

Page 347: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP

HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

PART 3: DIP – DIGITAL

Page 348: DIP User Manual
Page 349: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/60

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 8

2.1 Information presentation 8

2.2 Example in a paragraph 8

3. OVERVIEW 9

3.1 Foreword 9

3.2 System Required 9

3.3 Installing the HMI 9

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS 10

4.1 User level structure 10

4.2 Menus 11

5. DIP SECURITY PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 12

5.1 Rules for Password Creation 12

5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu 12

5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu 13

5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create Passwords> Menu 14

5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> 15

5.6 Exiting the Password Manager 15

5.7 Viewing the software version of the Password Manager 15

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 16

6.1 Main screen Description 16

6.2 Title bar 16

6.3 Menu bar 17

6.4 Toolbar 17

6.5 Pop-up menus 17

6.6 Status bars 18

6.7 Work and dialog zone. 19

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION 20

7.1 <File> Menu 20

7.2 <Tools> Menu 20

7.3 <Read> Menu 21

7.4 <Date> Menu 21

7.5 <Maintenance> menu 21

7.6 <?> Menu 21

Page 350: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 2/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8. OPERATION OF THE HMI 22

8.1 Launching the HMI 22

8.2 Configuration procedure 22

8.2.1 Configuration procedure from the <File> menu 22

8.2.2 Configuration procedure from the <Read> menu 22

8.3 <Tools> Menu 22

8.3.1 User level selection 23

8.3.2 Returning to level 0 23

8.3.3 Modify the password 23

8.3.4 Connect the HMI from the DIP 24

8.3.5 Disconnecting the HMI 24

8.4 Configuration window 24

8.4.1 Access to the Configuration window 24

8.4.2 Configuration window - <File> menu 26

8.4.3 Configuration window - <Modify> menu 27

8.5 Configuring General Parameters 27

8.6 Configuring the parameters of the communication interface 29

8.7 Configuring the redundancy interface 31

8.8 Configuring Input/output Parameters 33

8.8.1 Input filter configuration 33

8.8.2 Input logic configuration 34

8.8.3 State of output on Communication Major Alarm 35

8.9 Application parameters configuration 36

8.9.1 Configuration of transmission holding delays 36

8.9.2 Configuration of the holding times for a command restitution 37

8.9.3 Teleprotection scheme configuration 37

8.10 Alarm parameters configuration 38

8.10.1 Configuration of the bit error rate threshold 39

8.10.2 Configuration of the prolonged command alarm 39

8.10.3 Configuration of the communication time alarm 39

8.10.4 Configuration of the command relay delay 40

8.11 Entering comments 40

8.12 Sending a configuration file 41

8.13 <Read> Menu 41

Page 351: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/60

8.13.1 Menu Description 41

8.13.2 Reading a configuration 43

8.13.3 Reading the hardware configuration 43

8.13.4 Reading the DIP firmware version 44

8.13.5 Read comments 44

8.13.6 Read an events list 45

8.13.7 Read an alarms list 46

8.13.8 Reading counters 47

8.13.9 Reading instant alarms 48

8.13.10 Read input / output statuses 49

8.14 <Date> Menu 49

8.14.1 Read the date 49

8.14.2 Writing the date 50

8.15 <Maintenance> menu 50

8.15.1 Switch to the maintenance / operating mode 51

8.15.2 Blocking / Unblocking 52

8.15.3 Loopback 52

8.15.4 Forcing 52

8.15.5 Transmitter forcing 53

8.15.6 Restitution forcing 54

8.15.7 Alarms forcing 54

8.15.8 Interface forcing 55

8.15.9 Reset 56

8.15.10 Resetting the DIP 56

8.16 Expert Menu 57

8.17 Reading the version of the HMI 57

8.18 Exit the HMI. 57

9. EXAMPLE OF REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION 58

9.1 Example description 58

9.2 Prior conditions 58

Page 352: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 4/60 e-terragridcom DIP

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION 16

FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR 17

FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR 17

FIGURE 5 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR 18

FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY 19

FIGURE 7 – FILE MENU 20

FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW 25

FIGURE 9 – CONFIGURATION WINDOW TOOLBAR 25

FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION FILE MENU 26

FIGURE 11 – CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION 30

FIGURE 12 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENTS LIST 45

FIGURE 13 – EXAMPLE OF READING IN THE ALARMS LIST 46

FIGURE 14 – EXAMPLE OF LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS 47

Page 353: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/60

MODIFICATIONS PAGE

VERSION DATE COMMENTS

A 04/01/2001 Original issue

B 23/08/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version

C 12/07/2006 New features and additional technical explanations

D 14/11/2007 New chapter. Task oriented writing. HMI chapter separated in three sections: digital, single tone analog and dual tone analog.

E 11/02/2008 Minor corrections

A22 15/04/2009 Version 2.2

B22 23/12/2009 Minor corrections, added I/O SR200 optical interface IR187

A23 13/01/2011 Version 2.3

B23 28/03/2011 State of output on Communication Major Alarm added

Page 354: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 6/60 e-terragridcom DIP

GENERAL

This manual describes the Human-Machine Interface of the e-terragridcom DIP, i.e. the microcomputing application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this unit.

DEFINITIONS

HMI Tool for using the DIP (Human-Machine Interface).

Configuration All the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters (customization components) of a teleprotection.

Configuration File Micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a teleprotection.

Input password Password for accessing the ‘Password Manager’ utility.

User level All the authorized operations corresponding to the level of responsibility of a given operator.

Level password Password for accessing a user level.

NOTE: Windows and PC are registered trademarks.

Page 355: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/60

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.

THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)

SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.

(1) As per the option chosen

Page 356: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 8/60 e-terragridcom DIP

2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

The firmware or software version numbers which may appear in illustrations in this manual may not reflect the latest implemented in the unit; the information is nonetheless current.

2.1 Information presentation

Menu Path are indicated: Menu_level_entry1>Menu_level_entry2>.

Example: select File>New.

In the text Menu names are between <> example: Example: <DIP> menu.

In the text window names are between <>. Example: <Entry>.

A screen shot shows a button. Example: represents the OK button.

2.2 Example in a paragraph

<HISTORY> MENU NAME BETWEEN <>

To clear events (requires level 2):

Select History>Erase>Erase Events INDICATES THE ACCESS PATH

A <CAUTION> confirmation window opens: NAME OF THE WINDOW BETWEEN <>

Answer .SHOWS THE BUTTON

Page 357: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/60

3. OVERVIEW

3.1 Foreword

Thanks to its power and easy use, the HMI of the DIP teleprotection allows, either locally or remotely:

− complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other tools,

− filing of configurations (=>rationalization of commissioning actions),

− time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics),

− interactive and user-friendly maintenance,

− printing of unit parameters.

− This software has not been modified by adding new boards to the equipment:

− The SR200 board does not require programming,

− The IR187 board will be recognized automatically ; refer to chapter 8.6.

3.2 System Required

The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating under Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows XP Service Pack 2. The PC must feature at minimum:

− 40 MB free space on the HD,

− 256 MB RAM.

− A serial port, except if the DIP features the ME50 option which has an IP/RS232 converter

IMPORTANT: HAVING SEVERAL TASKS RUNNING CONCURRENTLY (DESKTOP OR OTHER TOOLS) MAY CAUSE PC-HMI TRANSMISSION FAULTS. THEREFORE, ALL OTHER APPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI.

When the PC has no serial port, use a PCMCIA converter rather than a USB converter.

3.3 Installing the HMI

For safety purposes, we recommend installing the HMI from a copy of the disc supplied. Installation:

− Insert the CD-ROM supplied in the drive.

− Run the setup.exe file from the <Run> menu in the Program manager: D\:setup.

− Follow the instructions.

Page 358: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 10/60 e-terragridcom DIP

4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS

4.1 User level structure

The DIP places operations in hierarchical order: some actions have no impact on unit operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific responsibility on the part of the operator.

The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2.

Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the command menus are displayed according to user level.

Page 359: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/60

4.2 Menus

Level

Menus 0 2

File New x x

Open x x

Exit x x

Tools User level selection x x

Returning to level 0 x x

Modify the password x x

Connect x x

Disconnect x x

Reading (local / remote) * Configuration x x

Hardware configuration x x

Version x x

Comments x x

Events file x x

Alarms file x x

Counters x x

Alarms snapshot x x

Input/Output x x

Remote reading Bit error rate

Date (local / remote) * read x x

write x

Maintenance * Maintenance mode/Operating mode x

unblocking line (security) line** x

unblocking line (security) relay** x

Local loop back** x

remote loop back** x

transmitter forcing** x

restitution forcing** x

alarms forcing** x

interface forcing**

Reset (local / remote) x

Reset (local / remote) x

Save environment x

TABLE 1 – MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL

* To access these menus, you need to be connected.

** Accessible only in maintenance mode

*** Accessible only in case of optical/electrical redundancy

Page 360: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 12/60 e-terragridcom DIP

5. DIP SECURITY PASSWORD MANAGEMENT

The DIP Security Password Manager application, associated to the HMI application, is used to create, modify, read and delete the passwords.

To launch the application, click the desktop icon “DIP Security” icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it.

For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.

5.1 Rules for Password Creation

Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from the following:

− upper case (A to Z)

− lower case (a to z)

− numbers (0 to 9)

− ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ¨ | ~

5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu

The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus: <Create> and <List>.

To access the Password Manager menus:

− Launch the DIP Security application by clicking the desktop icon. The <DIP password management> window opens:

− Select Password > Input, the <Password Input> window opens:

− Enter "DIP5000" upper case without the quotes in both windows (only upon first login).

Note: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended after the first use (see the next paragraph).

− Click the button.

Page 361: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/60

The following window opens:

The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available.

5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu

The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password.

Upon first use, use the ‘DIP5000’ password (upper case without the quotes). We recommend to then modify this password.

− Access the Manager menu (see § 5.2)

− Select Password > Modify. The following window opens:

− Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see § 5.1).

Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled.

− Click the button. The following window opens:

Page 362: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 14/60 e-terragridcom DIP

− Confirm the new password by re-entering it. The following window opens:

− Click the button.

5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create Passwords> Menu

Several passwords may be created.

To create user passwords, select <Create Passwords>.

The <Enter password s> window below opens:

− Enter the new password in the <Input password> field, in compliance with the rules

for Password Creation (see § 5.1).

− Define the user level associated with the password by checking the Level 2 button.

− Click the button. A confirmation messages appears:

− Click the button.

− If required, you may enter other passwords to be defined in the <Password> window.

− Once the operation has been completed, click the button. Check the list of passwords (refer to the next paragraph).

Page 363: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/60

5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords>

To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> of the Password Manager

The list of passwords is displayed.

− To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the

button. A confirmation message opens, answer

5.6 Exiting the Password Manager

To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select Password>Exit.

5.7 Viewing the software version of the Password Manager

Select ?> About…. The following window opens:

Page 364: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 16/60 e-terragridcom DIP

6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION

The HMI has an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes.

As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, it is recommended that operators not familiar with WINDOWS refer to the user manual for this environment.

6.1 Main screen Description

The base screen includes 5 functional zones (figure 1 and figure 2 below):

FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION

FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION

6.2 Title bar

The title bar displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.

Page 365: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/60

6.3 Menu bar

The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS HMI menus, displayed according to the current user level (password dependent).

FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR

6.4 Toolbar

The operator can launch commands and read information locally via the toolbar shortcuts

Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.

FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR

6.5 Pop-up menus

Right-click the workspace once logged onto a unit to display a pop-up menu to perform reading operations on the local or remote unit.

Page 366: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 18/60 e-terragridcom DIP

6.6 Status bars

Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear displaying the following information:

When the HMI is connected to the DIP in the maintenance mode, the upper bar is displayed:

− line status (blocked / unblocked)

− restitution relay status (blocked / unblocked)

− type of loopback (local loopback / remote loopback)

The status bar is displayed:

− the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon)

− the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance)

− address of the link or other information entered as comment

− transmission time

− bit error rate

− any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have triggered this alarm)

− user level (0 or 2)

FIGURE 5 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR

Page 367: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/60

6.7 Work and dialog zone.

Most orders are also issued using dialogue boxes (see figure 6 below). Six standard Windows tools are used:

− optional button groups

− tick boxes

− command buttons

− text boxes

− lists

− cursors

FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY

Page 368: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 20/60 e-terragridcom DIP

7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION

7.1 <File> Menu

The <File> menu provides access to elements allowing to create, modify and send configuration files. It also allows to open archived alarms files (*.Ala) and event files (*.Evt).

FIGURE 7 – FILE MENU

New: this menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration.

Open: this menu allows opening a previously saved configuration file or opening a list of alarms or events.

3 types of file can be opened:

− *.Cfg -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see figure 8)

− *.Ala -> alarm list file for consultation (see figure 13 for the window display)

− *.Evt -> event list file for consultation (see figure 11 for the window display)

Exit: closes the HMI program.

7.2 <Tools> Menu

User level selection: this menu allows to modify a user level.

Back to level 0: this menu allows to return to level 0, the lowest level of privilege.

Modify the password: this menu allows to enter a password saved in the CPU.

Connect: this menu allows to log onto the DIP and PC.

Disconnect: this menu allows to log off the DIP and PC.

Page 369: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/60

7.3 <Read> Menu

This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local or remote unit:

− Configuration: read all configuration parameters,

− Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters,

− Version: read firmware versions.

− Comments: read comments.

− Events file: read the events list.

− Alarms file: read the alarms list.

− Counters: read the local command counters.

− Alarms snapshot: ‘snapshot’ of the current alarm status.

− Input/Output: read input and output status.

In addition, remote reading provides access to:

− Bit error rate: bit error rate instant indication.

7.4 <Date> Menu

This menu enables you to read or write the date and time on the local or remote unit:

− Read: read the date and time on the local or remote unit.

− Write: write the date and time of the local or remote unit, either by copying the date and time of the PC, or sending a date and time chosen by the user.

7.5 <Maintenance> menu

Selecting this menu allows the following maintenance actions to be performed:

− Maintenance Mode: toggles between operating and maintenance modes.

− Blocking: allows to block or unblock the communication line and command restitution relays.

− Loopback: allows to perform a loopback either on the level of the local unit or remote unit.

− Forcing: allows to force commands in transmission or reception as well as force alarms relays.

− Interface: allows to force the optical or redundancy interface.

− Reset: allows to clear the history lists of events and alarms, as well as counters of the local or remote equipment.

− Reset: performs a hardware or software reset of the local or remote unit.

− Save environment: allows to save the events, alarms and counters lists in the .csv Excel-compatible format.

These files are placed in a directory where the HMI is installed.

7.6 <?> Menu

About: Indicates the software version of the HMI

Documentation: access to user manuals when they are installed.

Page 370: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 22/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8. OPERATION OF THE HMI

8.1 Launching the HMI

To launch the HMI, click the HMI icon

8.2 Configuration procedure

Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations.

The configuration of a new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating or modifying a configuration file by means of a configuration window (see § 8.4). The configuration window is accessible from the menu bar in two ways:

− <File> Menu

− <Read> Menu

8.2.1 Configuration procedure from the <File> menu

1. Click File>New or File>Open.

2. Modify the displayed configuration.

3. Save the changed configuration (File>Save as…>).

4. Send the configuration to the unit.

8.2.2 Configuration procedure from the <Read> menu

The configuration of the local or remote unit can be modified by reading this configuration:

1. Click Read>Local> or Remote>Configuration.

2. Modify the displayed configuration.

3. Save the changed configuration (File>Save as…>).

4. Send the configuration to the unit.

8.3 <Tools> Menu

The <Tools> menu allows entering a user password, return to the user 0 level and log on or log off the HMI application.

Page 371: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/60

8.3.1 User level selection

When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0.

To access a level 2, the user must enter a password. The level depends on the password. For more details about user level and password management see § 4.

1. Select Tools>Select user level. The <Enter password> window opens:

2. Enter the password.

3. Check the level granted in the status bar.

The password created previously is saved in the PC. If lost, just reinstall the HMI application on the PC and create the passwords again.

8.3.2 Returning to level 0

The user may return to level 0 at any time.

To set the user level to 0:

1. Select Tools>Return to level 0.

2. Check the user level in the status bar

8.3.3 Modify the password

Use the <Modify the password > submenu to create and / or change the embedded password. For more safety, this password is then saved in the unit.

PLEASE NOTE THAT IF YOU FORGET THE EMBEDDED PASSWORD, IT MAY BE RESET ONLY BY RETURNING THE MOTHERBOARD (UT148) TO THE PLANT.

Page 372: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 24/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.3.4 Connect the HMI from the DIP

Click the Connect icon to open the <Connect> window

You can choose among the ports found automatically by the HMI or the favorites defined beforehand. To create a new favorite, right-click the location where you wish to place the favorite.

Check the status information in the status bar.

Note: When the HMI is connected to the DIP, the information is displayed in the upper bar. For more information on the status bar information, refer to chapter 6.6.

8.3.5 Disconnecting the HMI

To log off the HMI:

1. Select Tools> Disconnect.

2. The HMI is logged off, the Read, Data and Maintenance options are grayed out and inaccessible.

8.4 Configuration window

8.4.1 Access to the Configuration window

Two methods allow to open the Configuration window from the <File>:

1. Select File> New to open a default configuration file.

2. Select File> Open to open an existing configuration file.

Page 373: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/60

The following window opens:

FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW

Note: Opening the configuration window is also possible via the menu bar by selecting Read > Local> Configuration.

The configuration window allows reading, modifying or creating configuration files.

Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.

FIGURE 9 – CONFIGURATION WINDOW TOOLBAR

Page 374: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 26/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.4.2 Configuration window - <File> menu

FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION FILE MENU

This menu allows configuration files to be saved, printed and closed.

Saving a configuration

To save a configuration:

1. Select File > Save.

2. Select a directory in the Windows environment.

3. Name the *.cfg file.

To print a configuration, select File > Print.

To exit the configuration window, select File> Exit.

Page 375: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/60

8.4.3 Configuration window - <Modify> menu

This menu allows to modify a configuration (default or new configuration).

To modify a configuration from the menu bar:

1. Select File>New or File>Open. The following configuration window opens:

8.5 Configuring General Parameters

1. Open the Main Configuration window (see § 8.4).

2. Select Modify>General. The <General configuration> window opens:

If necessary, modify the following parameter values:

Com. link: enter a value between 0 and 124.

Page 376: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 28/60 e-terragridcom DIP

Note: The remote unit and local DIP must have the same logical address.

Configuration: check the 2, 4 or 8 commands button.

Please note that the 8 commands box is accessible only when 2 input/output boards were entered in the Input/Output window

HMI port speed: select the value 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps using the scroll down window. The HMI will attempt to connect at the speed defined, in case of bad link, it will attempt to connect at lower speeds.

Master / slave: select the master or slave value for a unit.

A DIP teleprotection unit must be composed of a master unit and the other slave unit.

IRIG-B: select the value Off or On by checking the appropriate box.

Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector.

Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronization signal every 30 seconds).

Limited log length: Limits lists stored in the DIP to 255 events and 255 alarms instead of 1785 each.

This may be useful in case of remote access to a network to shorten the information download time.

During an intervention on running equipment, to ensure proper operation of this feature, delete the lists of events and alarms already saved in the DIPs.

Configuring number of I/O board : Select the matching the hardware configuration (1 or 2 boards) by checking the corresponding box.

3. Once all parameters defined, click the button.

The <General configuration> window closes.

4. Check that the configuration window was updated with the new parameter values:

Page 377: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/60

8.6 Configuring the parameters of the communication interface

1. Open the Configuration window (see § 8.4).

2. Select <Modify> Communication interface. The <Interface> window opens:

3. Select the interface module corresponding to the hardware configuration on the scrolling

windows. Possible values are:

− IR182 (optical interface). To be chosen for an IR182 board or an IR187 board in IR182 mode.

− IR173 G703-6 (2 MBps)

− IR179 V11 (RS 422)

− IR180 G703-1 codirectional (64 kbps)

− IR185 C37-94 (optical fiber interface). To be chosen for an IR185 board or an IR187 board in C37.94 mode.

4. Click the button. The following window opens:

Page 378: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 30/60 e-terragridcom DIP

5. Select the value Clock Source, Received or Internal, by checking the corresponding button.

The following table indicates the type of source according to the case:

Type of interface

DIP connected to a transmission unit

DIP direct copper connection

(laboratory test)

DIP connected to an optical fiber**

Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote

IR173 Received Received Internal Received N/A N/A

IR180 Received Received Internal Received N/A N/A

IR182 or

IR187(2)

N/A N/A N/A N/A Internal Internal

IR182(3)

Received Received N/A N/A N/A N/A

IR185 or

IR187(2)

Received Received N/A N/A Internal Received

* Case of the IR182 connected to the OCM5000, optical/V11 converter. This mode is not compatible with the IR187 board.

** The C37.94 mode is recommended with the IR187 board for this application.

Type of interface

DIP connected to a transmission unit

DIP direct copper connection

(laboratory test)

DIP in loopback (laboratory test)

Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote

IR179 NORMAL

(Tx and Rx clocks

received)

NORMAL

(Tx and Rx clocks

received)

NORMAL H2

Rate to be selected

between 32 and 256 kbps

H1

Rate to be selected

between 32 and 256 kbps

Loopback of T on R and

S on S'

FIGURE 11 – CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION

6. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.

When an IR187 board is used, the parameter indicates its programming mode, i.e. IR182 or IR185 for the C37.94 mode.

Page 379: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/60

8.7 Configuring the redundancy interface

With the optical interfaces IR182 and IR185, redundancy can be ensured with another digital interface IR173, 179 or 180.

The Redundancy interface corresponds to the redundant digital interface.

Prior conditions

The redundancy interface can be configured only if an optical interface was selected as

communication interface (see § 8.6).

Procedure

1. Open the <Configuration> window (see § 2).

2. Select <Modify> Redundancy interface. The <Redundancy interface> window opens:

3. Select the digital interface corresponding to the hardware configuration in the scrolling

window. Possible values:

− IR 180

− IR 173

− IR179

4. Click the button. The following window opens:

5. Select the value Clock Source, Received or Internal, by checking the corresponding

button.

Page 380: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 32/60 e-terragridcom DIP

6. Click the button. The following window opens:

7. Select the value of the TOGGLE delay parameter by placing the cursor properly. The

possible values are between 5 ms and 100 ms.

This means defining the time after which interface toggling will be performed.

8. Click the button.

9. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.

Page 381: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/60

8.8 Configuring Input/output Parameters

1. Open the Configuration window (see § 8.4).

2. Select Modify > Input / Output.

The <Input Output Configuration> window below opens:

8.8.1 Input filter configuration

Input filter

The Input filter delay corresponds to the minimum time for a signal command to be considered.

Select the delay matching each command using the cursor.

A window displaying the numeric values allows placing the cursor on the value required. The possible values are between 0 ms and 100 ms, by 1-ms steps.

We recommend to always leave a 1mS filtering minimum for the best protection against parasite signals which may be present on the command inputs.

For more information on this feature, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008

Reverse logic configuration

Parameter Description

Page 382: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 34/60 e-terragridcom DIP

Note: Using the reverse logic function, an idle input corresponds to a command. The matching input must be activated to stop sending commands

Procedure

Check the box associated with a command to apply reverse logic.

A warning message appears to indicate that a command will be sent until the input is activated.

8.8.2 Input logic configuration

Parameter Description

This logic allows to allocate a logical operator to a board input, then allocate a command. This function is available only when two boards are installed.

Logical operator available: OR,AND,LOG

OR

A command is emitted when one or the other inputs is active.

AND

A command is emitted when the two associated inputs are active.

Page 383: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/60

LOG

The following table describes the outputs corresponding to the possible combination of input signals for the LOG operator.

INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUTPUT

0 1 0

1 0 1

1 1 PREVIOUS STATE

0 0 PREVIOUS STATE

Procedure

To configure the input logic feature:

1. Click the button in the configuration window to pen the following window:

2. Check the box of the logical operator to allocate to a command.

3. Click the button in the <Input logic> window.

4. Click the button in the <Input Output Configuration> window.

The <Input Output Configuration> window closes.

5. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.

8.8.3 State of output on Communication Major Alarm

Parameter Description

Idle: the restitution relay is set to the idle state in case of alarm.

Former state: the restitution relay contact remains open or closed, even in case of alarm. The alarm has no impact on the status of the switch.

For each command

Select the Relay state on alarm parameter using the scrolling window.

Page 384: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 36/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.9 Application parameters configuration

1. Open the Configuration window (see § 8.4).

2. Select Modify>Application parameters:

The following window opens:

8.9.1 Configuration of transmission holding delays

The transmission holding delay corresponds to the validity time of an input command.

In the Transmission part, check the command to which a holding time is to be applied.

Click inside the green zone and enter the delay value (range of values from 20 to 200 ms).

Page 385: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/60

8.9.2 Configuration of the holding times for a command restitution

This parameter corresponds to the validity time of a command restitution.

1. Check the command restitution concerned.

2. Set the delay using the cursor (1 to 3000 ms).

3. Repeat this configuration for each command restitution to which a delay is to be applied.

For more information on configuring the holding times, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008

8.9.3 Teleprotection scheme configuration

1. In the scroll-down menu, select the teleprotection scheme of the receiver to apply to commands 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8:

− Presmissive trip

− Teletrip

− Blocking

Page 386: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 38/60 e-terragridcom DIP

2. Click the button.

3. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.

8.10 Alarm parameters configuration

1. Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).

2. Select Modify > Alarms.

The <Alarms Configuration> window opens:

REMINDER:

A MINOR ALARM INDICATES A PROBLEM BUT THE EQUIPMENT CONTINUES OPERATING.

A MAJOR ALARM INDICATES A PROBLEM BUT THE EQUIPMENT IS BLOCKED. COMMAND ACQUISITION AND RESTITUTION ARE INHIBITED.

Page 387: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/60

8.10.1 Configuration of the bit error rate threshold

1. Check the Bit error rate button corresponding to the minor alarm threshold required.

2. Check the Bit error rate button corresponding to the major alarm threshold required.

3. We recommend to leave the default values. 1xE-3 for the minor alarm and 1xE-2 for the major alarm.

8.10.2 Configuration of the prolonged command alarm

I

If an input signal exceeds the threshold defined, an alarm is triggered.

1. Check the Alarm upon prolonged command box.

2. Place the cursor to define a duration (between 1 and 30 seconds per 1-second steps).

3. Allocate a minor or major level by checking the corresponding button.

8.10.3 Configuration of the communication time alarm

If the communication time exceeds the threshold defined, an alarm is triggered.

1. Check the Alarm upon communication time box.

2. Place the cursor to define a transmission time (between 3 and 20 ms).

3. Allocate a minor or major level by checking the corresponding button.

Page 388: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 40/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.10.4 Configuration of the command relay delay

Closing of the contact relay can be delayed. Possible values are:

− 0

− 2.5 s

− 5 s

− 10 s

For each relay 1 and 2, a major alarm and a minor alarm are possible:

Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button.

8.11 Entering comments

The user can enter comments.

To enter comments:

1. Open the Configuration window (see § 8.4).

2. Select Modify > Comments.

The following window opens:

1. Fill in the following information fields:

− Local station name (20 characters max)

− Remote station name (20 characters max)

2. Enter the comments in the <Comments> field.

Page 389: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/60

3. Click the button.

4. Enter the comments in the <Configuration> field.

8.12 Sending a configuration file

This menu allows to send a configuration from the PC HMI to the teleprotection unit.

Prior conditions

Sending a configuration is possible with the user 2 level. The HMI must be connected to the teleprotection unit.

Procedure

To send the configuration, select the <Send> menu (Local or Remote) from the <Configuration> menu:

If the configuration transmission is successful, a message window opens:

Click the OK button, the DIP resets.

8.13 <Read> Menu

8.13.1 Menu Description

The <Read> menu allows to display the following information on the local or remote teleprotection unit:

− Configuration

Page 390: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 42/60 e-terragridcom DIP

− Hardware configuration

− DIP firmware version

− Comments

− Event list

− Alarms list

− Counters

− Alarms snapshot

− Inputs / Outputs state

− Remote bit error rate (the local bit error rate is displayed permanently in the lower status bar)

Page 391: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/60

8.13.2 Reading a configuration

To read the local configuration, select Read> Local> Configuration. The following configuration window opens:

Note: To read the remote configuration, select Read> Remote>

Configuration.

8.13.3 Reading the hardware configuration

To read the local hardware configuration, select Read> Local> Hardware configuration. The following window opens:

Page 392: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 44/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.13.4 Reading the DIP firmware version

To read the software version in local, select Read> Local> Version. The following window opens:

8.13.5 Read comments

To read comments, select Read> Local> Comments. The following window opens:

Page 393: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 45/60

8.13.6 Read an events list

To read events, select Read> Local>Events list. The following window opens:

FIGURE 12 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENTS LIST

The capacity of the list is 1785 events.

Click the tool to refresh the list

Click the disquette tool (or use the menu File>Save) to generate the events file (*.evt) viewable by the menu File>Open in the main screen.

Click the printer tool (or use the menu File>Print) to print the events file.

Click the tool to export the events file in the Excel compatible format.

Page 394: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 46/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.13.7 Read an alarms list

To read the alarms list in local, select Read> Local> Alarms list. The following window opens:

FIGURE 13 – EXAMPLE OF READING IN THE ALARMS LIST

The capacity of the list is 1785 alarms.

Click the tool to refresh the list

Click the disquette tool (or use the menu File>Save) to generate the events file (*.evt) viewable by the menu File>Open in the main screen.

Click the printer tool (or use the menu File>Print) to print the events file.

Click the tool to export the alarms file in the Excel compatible format.

Page 395: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 47/60

8.13.8 Reading counters

To read the counters, select Read> Local> Counter. The following window opens:

FIGURE 14 – EXAMPLE OF LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS

Click the tool to refresh the list

Click the disquette tool (or use the menu File>Save) to generate the counters file (*.cpt) viewable by the menu File>Open in the main screen.

Click the printer tool (or use the menu File>Print) to print the alarms file.

Page 396: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 48/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.13.9 Reading instant alarms

To read instant alarms, select Read> Local> Instant alarms. The following window opens:

Check the ‘Refresh’ box to refresh the view automatically every 3 seconds.

Note: Instant alarms can also be read by clicking Alarm visible in the status bar in case of alarm.

Page 397: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 49/60

8.13.10 Read input / output statuses

To read input / output statuses, select Read> Local> Input Output. The following window opens:

This view is refreshed automatically every 3 seconds.

8.14 <Date> Menu

The <Date> menu allows to read or write the date of local or remote teleprotection unit.

8.14.1 Read the date

Select Date> Local> Read. The following window opens:

Page 398: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 50/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.14.2 Writing the date

Select Date> Local> Write. The following window opens:

The scrolling menus allow selecting the day, month, year and time.

8.15 <Maintenance> menu

Level 2 is required to access this command

The <Maintenance> menu allows the following operations:

− <Maintenance mode / Operating mode>: switch to the maintenance mode or operating mode.

− <Blocking / unblocking>: blocking / unblocking the communication line and restitution relays.

− <Loopback>: local or remote loopback. Remote loopback is accessible only if the line has been unblocked.

− <Forcing>: transmitter, command restitution alarms.

− <Interface> (accessible in operating mode and only when redundancy has been activated): forces the active interface (optical or redundancy).

Page 399: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 51/60

− <reset>: clear events, alarms or counters (local or remote).

− <Reset> local or remote. Resetting the DIP

− <Save environment>, allows saving the files of events, alarms or counters in the Excel-compatible format

THE HMI DOES NOT OPERATE AS A SIMULATOR. MORE PARTICULARLY, FORCING TRIGGERS ACTUAL COMMAND TRANSMISSIONS AND RENDERING. THEREFORE, UNTIMELY USE OF THESE COMMANDS MAY HAVE A SEVERE IMPACT ON THE OPERATION.

8.15.1 Switch to the maintenance / operating mode

To switch from the Maintenance mode to the operating mode (requires level 2)

1. Select Maintenance>Operating mode.

The following window appears and displays a message indicating data was transmitted successfully:

2. Check that appears in the status bar.

To switch from the <Maintenance> mode to the <Operating mode>:

3. Select Operating mode> Maintenance mode.

The <Transmitted data> message is displayed.

4. Check that appears in the status bar.

Page 400: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 52/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.15.2 Blocking / Unblocking

The <Blocking> menu is available in the Maintenance mode.

1. Select Blocking > Unblocking / Blocking the line to unblock / block a line.

Unblocking the line allows to restore communication between both DIP. A command can be transmitted to the remote unit.

2. Select Blocking > Unblocking / Blocking relay to unblock / block a relay.

Unblocking a relay allows to restore the connection between the local DIP and the protection relays it is connected to. A command can be received locally.

3. The line status and relay status displayed in the upper bar are updated:

8.15.3 Loopback

1. Select Loopback > Local loopback deactivated to deactivate loopback.

2. Select Loopback > Local loopback activated to activate loopback.

3. The type of loopback displayed in the upper status bar is up to date:

8.15.4 Forcing

The forcing menus are available in maintenance mode from user 2 level.

Page 401: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 53/60

8.15.5 Transmitter forcing

CAUTION ! COMMANDS ARE LAUNCHED USING THIS FEATURE.

Prior conditions

The active mode must be Operational

User level 2.

Procedure

To force the transmitter:

Select Forcing > Transmitter forcing.

The following window opens:

1. Check the boxes matching the commands to be forced.

2. Click the button.

A warning message is displayed to report that local command restitutions are activated.

3. Click the Yes button to confirm.

Page 402: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 54/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.15.6 Restitution forcing

This command allows to force the commands in order to check their operational status.

To force the commands:

Select> Forcing command reception.

The following window opens.

Check the box matching the command to force.

Click the button.

The Data transmitted message is displayed.

If the relays are unblocked, the commands received are transmitted locally to the protection relay connected to the DIP.

8.15.7 Alarms forcing

This command allows to force the alarms in order to check their operation.

To force the alarms:

Select Forcing > Alarms. The <Forcing alarms> window opens:

Check the Minor or Major box, or both, for alarms to be forced.

Click the button.

The Data transmitted message is displayed.

Check the alarms status LEDs and the associated switches on connector P16.

Page 403: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 55/60

8.15.8 Interface forcing

Prior conditions

The redundancy feature must be activated.

User level 2.

The mode must be <Maintenance>.

Procedure

This command allows, when the redundancy function is activated, to switch from the optical interface to another digital interface, and vice versa.

To switch from one interface to the other:

1. Select Maintenance> Interface. The following window opens:

The active interface is identified by a dot in the corresponding button.

Click the button of the interface required.

Click the button.

The following confirmation window opens:

Click the Yes button. The Data transmitted message is displayed.

The DIP resets.

After resetting, check that the switch was successful by selecting Maintenance> Interface, the active interface must have changed.

Page 404: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 56/60 e-terragridcom DIP

8.15.9 Reset

This command allows clearing files of events, alarms or counters on a local or remote teleprotection unit.

To clear the histories, select Clear histories> Local> Events or History> Local> Alarms.

The warning message <Are you sure ?> is displayed. Answer Yes.

A confirmation of clearing events/alarms is displayed.

8.15.10 Resetting the DIP

This command allows resetting the DIP in local in the <Operating mode>, in local and remote in the <Maintenance> mode.

To reset the DIP, select Reset > Local or Reset> Remote.

A message appears, confirming the reset.

Page 405: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 57/60

8.16 Expert Menu

This command allows to block the oscillator.

This means time stamping to save the batteries in case of extended storage of the teleprotection.

Restarting is performed simply by resetting the time of the DIP. See § 8.14.2.

NOTE: The battery is used to save the time, events and alarms lists as well as command counters.

8.17 Reading the version of the HMI

To read the software version of the HMI, select <?>: About. The following window opens:

8.18 Exit the HMI.

To exit the HMI, click the submenu <Exit> in the <File> menu of the base screen.

Page 406: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 58/60 e-terragridcom DIP

9. EXAMPLE OF REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION

9.1 Example description

The following procedure describes the configuration of the redundancy function with main interface IR185, the redundancy interface IR180, the clock and a 10 ms delay.

9.2 Prior conditions

IR185 and IR 180 must be installed in the DIP.

Read the hardware configuration, by selecting Read> Local> Hardware configuration. The following window opens:

IR 180 and IR 182 must be present.

9.2.1.1 Configuration

Select Read> Local>Configuration to open the configuration file.

Select Modify> Comm. interface. The following window opens:

Page 407: DIP User Manual

Human Machine Interface

DIP/EN HI/B23

DIGITAL

e-terragridcom DIP Page 59/60

Select IR185 in the scroll down menu.

Click the button.

Select <Modify> Redundancy interface. The following window opens:

Select IR180 in the scroll down menu.

Click the Trigger button. The following window opens:

.

Adjust the delay before switching to place the cursor on 10 ms.

Click the button.

Check that the configuration window was updated with the new parameter values:

Page 408: DIP User Manual

DIP/EN HI/B23

Human Machine Interface

DIGITAL

Page 60/60 e-terragridcom DIP

Comment on the switching delay:

The switching time can be set between 5 and 100 ms for each side. This means the total time measured is:

Switching time = trip time Dip1 + trigger time Dip2 + about 8 ms for the communication of the Dip.

This optical-electric switching redundancy procedure is automatic.

Page 409: DIP User Manual

Alstom Grid e-terragridcom DIP © - ALSTOM 2010. ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of ALSTOM. The other names mentioned, registered or not, are the property of their respective companies. The technical and other data contained in this document is provided for information only. Neither ALSTOM, its officers and employees accept responsibility for or should be taken as making any representation or warranty (whether express or implied) as to the accuracy or completeness of such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or change this data at any time without further notice. Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre www.grid.alstom.com/contactcentre/ Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070

www.alstom.com